3WL Siemens
-
Upload
rockclaudiu -
Category
Documents
-
view
131 -
download
1
Transcript of 3WL Siemens
Siemens LV 1 · 2009
1515/2 Introduction
3WL Air Circuit Breakers
3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
15/6 General data15/7 3-pole, fixed-mounted versions15/11 3-pole, withdrawable versions15/15 4-pole, fixed-mounted versions15/19 4-pole, withdrawable versions15/23 Options15/29 Accessories and spare parts
3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)
15/50 3- and 4-pole, fixed-mounted versions15/51 3-pole, withdrawable versions15/52 4-pole, withdrawable versions15/53 Accessories and spare parts
SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices – Air Circuit Breakers
© Siemens AG 2009
SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices — Air Circuit Breakers
Introduction
15/2 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
15
■ Overview
✓ Standard-- Not available❑ Optional1) ETU15B cannot be used with 3WL circuit breakers, size III.
3WL air circuit breakers/non-automatic air circuit breakers according to UL 489 up to 5000 A, see Catalog LV 16.
Air circuit breakers 3WL air circuit breakers/non-automatic air circuit breakers up to 6300 A (AC) 3WL non-automatic air circuit breakers up to 4000 A (DC)
Size I, II, III II
Rated current In A 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3200, 4000, 5000, 6300
1000, 2000, 4000
Number of poles 3-pole, 4-pole 3-pole, 4-pole
Rated operational voltage Ue
V ACV DC
... 690/1000/1150--
--... 1000
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity at 500 V AC
kA
Size I
55/66
Size II
66/80/100
Size III
100/150 (3-pole), 130 (4-pole)
30/25/20 (at 300/600/1000 V DC)
Endurance Operating cycles
20000 15000 10000 15000
Mounting position
Degree of protectionWith cover IP55 IP55Without cover (with door sealing frame)
IP41 IP41
Dimensions 3-/4-pole
W mm 320/410 460/590 704/914 460/590
H mm 434 434 434 434D mm
H mmD mm
291
465.5471
291
465.5471
291
465.5471
291
465.5471
Type ETU15B1) ETU25B ETU27B ETU45B ETU76BElectronic releases for SENTRON 3WL circuit breakersOverload protection ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Short-time delayed short-circuit protection
-- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Instantaneous short-circuit protection
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Neutral conductor protection -- -- ✓ ✓ ✓
Ground-fault protection -- -- ✓ ❑ ❑
Zone Selective Interlocking -- -- -- ❑ ❑
LCD, 4-line -- -- -- ❑ --
LCD, graphic -- -- -- -- ✓
Communication through PROFIBUS DP
-- -- -- ❑ ❑
Measurement function Plus -- -- -- ❑ ❑
Selectable parameter sets -- -- -- -- ✓
Parameters freely programmable -- -- -- -- ✓
CubicleBUS -- -- -- ✓ ✓
Size IIISize IISize I
� � � � � � � � � �
� � � �
� � � � � � � � � �
� � � �
� � � � � � � � � �
� � � �
� � � � � � � � � �
� � � �
NSS0_00535
H
W D
NS
E0_
0110
6a
NS
E0_
0110
7a
NS
E0_
0110
8a
NS
E0_
0110
9a Rating Plug
NS
E0_
0111
1a
Fixed mounting
Withdraw-able
© Siemens AG 2009
15
SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices — Air Circuit Breakers
Introduction
15/3Siemens LV 1 · 2009
Switching capacity
1) Size II with In max � 2500 A.2) Size II with In max = 3200 A and In max = 4000 A.3) At a rated voltage of 690 V the Icw value of the circuit breaker cannot be
greater than the Icu or Ics value at 690 V.4) Rated operational voltage Ue = 1150 V.
Size I II III
Type 3WL11 3WL12 3WL13
Switching capacity class N S N S H H C3-pole
C4-pole
Short-circuit breaking capacityRated operational voltage Ue up to 415 V AC
Icu kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
Ics kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
Icm kA 121 145 145 176 220 220 330 286
Rated operational voltage Ue up to 500 V AC
Icu kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
Ics kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
Icm kA 121 145 145 176 220 220 330 286
Rated operational voltage Ue up to 690 V AC
Icu kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 150 130
Ics kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 150 130
Icm kA 88 105 105 165 187 187 330 286
Rated operational voltage Ue up to 1000 V/1150 V AC
Icu kA -- -- -- -- 50 50 704) 704)
Ics kA -- -- -- -- 50 50 704) 704)
Icm kA -- -- -- -- 150 105 1544) 1544)
Rated short-time withstand current Icw of the circuit breakers3)
0.5 s kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 100 100
1 s kA 42 50 55 66 80 100 100 100
2 s kA 29.5 35 39 46 651)/702) 80 80 80
3 s kA 24 29 32 37 501)/652) 65 65 65Short-circuit breaking capacity Icc of the non-automatic air circuit breakersUp to 500 V AC kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 100 100
Up to 690 V AC kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 100 100
N S N S H H C C
Circuit breakers with ECO switching capacity N (Icu = Ics up to 55 kA size I/up to 66 kA size II at 500 V)
Circuit breakers with standard switching capacity S (Icu = Ics up to 66 kA size I/up to 80 kA size II at 500 V)
Circuit breakers with high switching capacity H (Icu = Ics up to 100 kA at 500 V)
Circuit breakers with very high switching capacity C (Icu = Ics up to 150 kA (3-pole)/130 kA (4-pole) at 500 V)
Non-automatic air circuit breakers with DC switching capacity
These circuit breakers are indicated in the selection and ordering data by orange backgrounds.
N
S
H
C
DC
© Siemens AG 2009
SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices — Air Circuit Breakers
Introduction
15/4 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
15
SENTRON 3WL: Superior individual products integrated into uniform power distribution systems - up to and including industry-specific industrial and infrastructure solutions
$ Guide frame (pages 15/30 to 15/33)
% Main circuit connection front, flange, horizontal, vertical (pages 15/45 and 15/46)
& Position indicator switch (pages 15/26 and 15/38)
( Grounding contact, leading (page 15/42)
) Shutter (page 15/41)
* COM15 PROFIBUS module or COM16 MODBUS module (page 15/44)
+ External CubicleBUS module (page 15/43)
, Closing solenoid, auxiliary release (page 15/40)
- Auxiliary conductor plug-in system (page 15/39)
. Auxiliary switch block (page 15/40)
/ Door sealing frame (page 15/41)
0 Interlocking set for base plate (page 15/36)
1 Transparent panel, function insert (page 15/35)
2 EMERGENCY-STOP pushbutton, key operated (page 15/38)
3 Motorized operating mechanism (page 15/40)
4 Operating cycles counter (page 15/38)
5 Breaker Status Sensor (BSS) (page 15/44)
6 Protective device with device holder, electronic release (ETU) (page 15/34)
7 Remote reset solenoid (page 15/35)
8 Breaker Data Adapter (BDA) (page 15/43)
9 Four-line display (page 15/34)
: Ground-fault protection module (page 15/34)
; Rated current module (page 15/34)
< Measuring function module (page 15/34)
= Circuit breaker (pages 15/7 to 15/22)
18
17
1620
15
21
23
22
24
14
19
6
45
7
8
9
2
25
10
11
12
13
3
1
NS
E0_
0188
7a
© Siemens AG 2009
15
SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices — Air Circuit Breakers
Introduction
15/5Siemens LV 1 · 2009
Communication-capable circuit breakers (with ETU45B or ETU76B electronic release)
Features• Coordinated communication concept using the PROFIBUS DP
or MODBUS, ranging from 16 A to 6300 A with SENTRON 3VL and SENTRON 3WL
• The high level of modularity of circuit breakers and accessories allows easy retrofitting of all communication components
• Significant additional benefits for the switchboard due to the possibility of linking up external input and output modules to the circuit breaker-internal CubicleBUS of the SENTRON 3WL
• Innovative software products for parameterization, operation, monitoring, and diagnostics of SENTRON circuit breakers, both locally or via PROFIBUS DP, MODBUS or Ethernet/Intranet/Internet
• Complete integration of the SENTRON circuit breakers into the Totally Integrated Power and Totally Integrated Automation solutions
Communication: • For air circuit breakers with optional communication function
(ETU45B or ETU76B electronic release) see pages 15/7 to 15/22.
• For accessories see pages 15/43 and 15/44. • For more information see also the chapter "Power Manage-
ment System" and "Software for Power Distribution".
5
1
21
22
19
8 6
2
4
20
14 15 16 17 18 7
91
3
10
11
12
13
SENTRON 3VLElectronic LCD ETU releaseElectronic ETU releaseCOM10 PROFIBUS module complete with ZSICOM20 PROFIBUS module2) complete with ZSIBreaker Data Adapter (BDA)BDA Plus with Ethernet interfaceBrowser-capable input and output device (e.g. notebook)SENTRON 3WLCOM15 PROFIBUS module1)
Breaker Status Sensor (BSS)
1) For a MODBUS connection the COM16 module is required.2) For a MODBUS connection the COM21 module is required.
1234567891011
Electronic ETU releaseMeasurement function PlusZSI moduleDigital output module with relay contactsDigital output module with relay contacts, configurableAnalog output moduleDigital input moduleSwitch ES Power on PCPLC e.g. SIMATIC S7SIMATIC powercontrolPAC
1213141516171819202122
NS
E0_
0110
5h
PROFIBUS
Ethernet
CubicleBUS
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
15/6 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
15
■ Benefits
Low space requirements
The SENTRON 3WL devices require very little space. Size I de-vices (up to 1600 A) fit into a 400 mm wide switchgear panel. Size III devices (up to 6300 A) are the smallest of their kind and with their construction width of 704 mm fit into a 800 mm wide switchgear panel.
Modular design
Components like auxiliary releases, motorized operating mechanisms, electronic releases, current sensors, auxiliary cir-cuit signaling switches, automatic reset devices, interlocks and engagement operating mechanisms can all be exchanged or retrofitted at a later stage, thus allowing the circuit breaker to be adapted to new, changing requirements.
The main contact elements can all be replaced in order to in-crease the endurance of the circuit breaker.
Retrofittable modules for electronic releases
Modularity is one of the main features of the new SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers. Special LCDs, ground-fault modules, rated current modules and communication modules for the electronic releases are available for fast and easy retrofitting and adaptation to changing requirements.
Communication
The use of modern communication-capable circuit breakers opens up completely new possibilities in terms of start-up, parameterization, diagnostics, maintenance and operation. This allows many different ways of reducing costs and improving pro-ductivity in industrial plants, buildings and infrastructure projects to be achieved.
• Fast and reliable parameterization• Timely information and response can prevent plant
stoppages• Effective diagnostics management• Measured values are the basis for efficient load management,
for drawing up power demand profiles and for assigning en-ergy to cost centers
• Preventive maintenance reduces the risk of expansive plant down-times
■ Application • As incoming-feeder, distribution, tie, and outgoing-feeder cir-
cuit breakers in electrical installations• For switching and protecting motors, capacitors, generators,
transformers, busbars and cables
Due to the reinforced use of electronic I&C systems, the de-mands made on air circuit breakers in terms of operator control and monitoring of network processes have increased.
The extensive, coordinated SENTRON range of devices covers all applications between 16 A and 6300 A with compact and air circuit breakers.
The AC devices are available as circuit breakers and non-auto-matic air circuit breakers. DC devices are only available as non-automatic air circuit breakers.
Standards
SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers comply with:• IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1• IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2• Climate-proof according to IEC 60068-2-30.
Versions with UL 489 also available, see Catalog LV 16.
For further standards, see Appendix.
Conductor cross-sections
1) ETU76B with graphics display can be used up to max. 55 °C.
2) Minimum main conductor cross-sections for 4-pole withdrawable circuit breakers: 4 × 120 × 10 mm.
Size I IIType Up to
3WL11 103WL11 12 3WL11 16 3WL12 08 3WL12 10 3WL12 12 3WL12 16 3WL12 20
Permissible load At rear horizontal main circuit connections
• Up to 55 °C (Cu bare)• Up to 60 °C (Cu bare)1)
• Up to 70 °C (Cu blackpainted)1)
AAA
100010001000
125012501210
160016001490
800800800
100010001000
125012501250
160016001600
200020002000
Main conductor minimum cross-sections
• Copper bars, bare
• Copper bars, painted black
Unit(s)mm2
Unit(s)mm2
1 × 60 × 10
1 × 60 × 10
2 × 40 × 10
2 × 40 × 10
2 × 50 × 10
2 × 50 × 10
1 × 50 × 10
1 × 50 × 10
1 × 60 × 10
1 × 60 × 10
2 × 40 × 10
2 × 40 × 10
2 × 50 × 10
2 × 50 × 10
3 × 50 × 10
3 × 50 × 10
Size II III
Type 3WL12 25 3WL12 32 3WL12 40 3WL13 40 3WL13 50 3WL13 63
Permissible load • Up to 55 °C (Cu bare)• Up to 60 °C (Cu bare)1)
• Up to 70 °C (Cu blackpainted)1)
AAA
250025002280
320030202870
395038103600
400040004000
500050005000
592058105500
Main conductor minimum cross-sections
• Copper bars, bare
• Copper bars, painted black
Unit(s)mm2
Unit(s)mm2
2 × 100 × 10
2 × 100 × 10
3 × 100 × 10
3 × 100 × 10
4 × 120 × 10
4 × 100 × 102)
4 x 100 x 10
4 × 100 × 10
6 x 100 x 10
6 × 100 × 10
6 x 120 x 10
6 × 120 × 10
© Siemens AG 2009
15
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
3-pole, fixed-mounted versions
15/7Siemens LV 1 · 2009* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
■ Selection and ordering data
For footnotes see page 15/10.
Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.
Rated current1) In
Icu up to 55/66 kA at 500 V,ECO switching capacity N
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.Order No.
For Order No. supplements, see page 15/23
Basic price per PU
A A kA DT kgHorizontal main circuit connectionI 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
Vertical main circuit connectionI 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000II 4000 4000 66 B 3WL12 40-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 85.000
Front main circuit connection, single holeI 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
Front main circuit connection, double holeI 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Add. price
Without electronic release AA Without
Electronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU15B: Protection functions LI BBETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NB
Versions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NG
Standard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without
N
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
3-pole, fixed-mounted versions
15/8 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
15
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
For footnotes see page 15/10.
Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.
Rated current1) In
Icu up to 66/80 kA at 500 V, standard switching capacity S
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.Order No.
For Order No. supplements, see page 15/23
Basic price per PU
A A kA DT kg
Horizontal main circuit connectionI 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
Vertical main circuit connectionI 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000II 4000 4000 80 B 3WL12 40-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 85.000
Front main circuit connection, single holeI 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
Front main circuit connection, double holeI 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional price
Without electronic release AA Without
Electronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU15B: Protection functions LI BBETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NB
Versions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NG
Standard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without
S
© Siemens AG 2009
15
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
3-pole, fixed-mounted versions
15/9Siemens LV 1 · 2009* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
For footnotes see page 15/10.
Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.
Rated current1) In
Icu up to 100 kA at 500 V, high switching capacity H
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.Order No.
Order No. supplements, see page 15/23
Basic price per PU
A A kA DT kgHorizontal main circuit connectionII 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
Vertical main circuit connectionII 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000II 4000 4000 100 B 3WL12 40-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 85.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000III 6300 6300 100 B 3WL13 63-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 90.000
Front main circuit connection, single holeII 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
Front main circuit connection, double holeII 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional price
Without electronic release AA Without
Electronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU15B: Protection functions LI6) BBETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NB
Versions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NG
Standard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without
H
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
3-pole, fixed-mounted versions
15/10 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
15
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Footnotes for pages 15/7 to 15/10:1) The rated current is determined by the rated current module. For the stan-
dard version, the supplied module is equal to the maximum rated current. If a lower rated current is required, adaptation by order code on page 15/24.
2) For permissible rated short-time current Icc and rated short-circuit making capacity Icm for non-automatic air circuit breakers see Technical Informa-tion LV 1T, "Technical specifications".
3) Current transformers for protection of the N conductor and current trans-formers for detection of the ground-fault current in the grounded neutral point of the transformer are to be ordered separately, see page 15/34.
4) Current transformers for protection of the N conductor are to be ordered separately, see page 15/34.
5) ETU45B and ETU76B with ground-fault protection module GFM AT (alarm and tripping), see page 15/34.
6) ETU15B cannot be used with 3WL circuit breakers, size III.
Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.
Rated current1) In
Icu up to 150 kA at 500 V, very high switching capacity C
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.Order No.
Order No. supplements, see page 15/23
Basic price per PU
A A kA DT kgHorizontal main circuit connectionIII 4000 4000 150 B 3WL13 40-5@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000III 5000 5000 150 B 3WL13 50-5@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
Vertical main circuit connectionIII 4000 4000 150 B 3WL13 40-5@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000III 5000 5000 150 B 3WL13 50-5@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000III 6300 6300 150 B 3WL13 63-5@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 90.000
Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional price
Without electronic release AA Without
Electronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NB
Versions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NG
Standard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without
C
© Siemens AG 2009
15
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
3-pole, withdrawable versions
15/11Siemens LV 1 · 2009* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
■ Selection and ordering data
For footnotes see page 15/14.
Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.
Rated current1) In
Icu up to 55/66 kA at 500 V,ECO switching capacity N
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx. Order No.
For Order No. supplements, see page 15/23
Basic price per PU
A A kA DT kgWithout guide frames (for guide frames, see page 15/30 to 15/33)I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 63.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 68.000With guide frames, horizontal main circuit connectionI 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000With guide frames, vertical main circuit connectionI 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000II 4000 4000 66 B 3WL12 40-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 121.000With guide frames, connecting flangesI 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000
Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional price
Without electronic release AA Without
Electronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU15B: Protection functions LI BBETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NBVersions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NG
Standard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements for circuit breakers and guide frames, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without
N
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
3-pole, withdrawable versions
15/12 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
15
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
For footnotes see page 15/14.
Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.
Rated current1) In
Icu up to 66/80 kA at 500 V, standard switching capacity S
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx. Order No.
For Order No. supplements, see page 15/23
Basic price per PU
A A kA DT kg
Without guide frames (for guide frames, see page 15/30 to 15/33)I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 63.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 68.000
With guide frames, horizontal main circuit connectionI 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000
With guide frames, vertical main circuit connectionI 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000II 4000 4000 80 B 3WL12 40-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 121.000
With guide frames, connecting flangesI 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000
Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional price
Without electronic release AA Without
Electronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU15B: Protection functions LI BBETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NBVersions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NG
Standard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements for circuit breakers and guide frames, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without
S
© Siemens AG 2009
15
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
3-pole, withdrawable versions
15/13Siemens LV 1 · 2009* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
For footnotes see page 15/14.
Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.
Rated current1) In
Icu up to 100 kA at 500 V, high switching capacity H
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.Order No.
Order No. supplements, see page 15/23
Basic price per PU
A A kA DT kgWithout guide frames (for guide frames, see page 15/30 to 15/33)II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 63.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 68.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 88.000III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 88.000III 6300 6300 100 B 3WL13 63-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 96.000
With guide frames, horizontal main circuit connectionII 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000
With guide frames, vertical main circuit connectionII 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000II 4000 4000 100 B 3WL12 40-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 121.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000III 6300 6300 100 B 3WL13 63-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 166.000
With guide frames, connecting flangesII 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000
Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional price
Without electronic release AA Without
Electronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU15B: Protection functions LI6) BBETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NB
Versions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NG
Standard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements for circuit breakers and guide frames, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without
H
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
3-pole, withdrawable versions
15/14 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
15
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Footnotes for pages 15/11 to 15/14:1) The rated current is determined by the rated current module. For the stan-
dard version, the supplied module is equal to the maximum rated current. If a lower rated current is required, adaptation by order code on page 15/24.
2) For permissible rated short-time current Icc and rated short-circuit making capacity Icm for non-automatic air circuit breakers see Technical Informa-tion LV 1T, "Technical specifications".
3) Current transformers for protection of the N conductor and current trans-formers for detection of the ground-fault current in the grounded neutral point of the transformer are to be ordered separately, see page 15/34.
4) Current transformers for protection of the N conductor are to be ordered separately, see page 15/34.
5) ETU45B to ETU76B with ground-fault protection module GFM AT (alarm and tripping), see page 15/34.
6) ETU15B cannot be used with 3WL circuit breakers, size III.
Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.
Rated current1) In
Icu up to 150 kA at 500 V, very high switching capacity C
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.Order No.
Order No. supplements, see page 15/23
Basic price per PU
A A kA DT kgWithout guide frames (for guide frames, see page 15/30 to 15/33)III 4000 4000 150 B 3WL13 40-5@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 88.000III 5000 5000 150 B 3WL13 50-5@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 88.000III 6300 6300 150 B 3WL13 63-5@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 96.000
With guide frames, horizontal main circuit connectionIII 4000 4000 150 B 3WL13 40-5@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000III 5000 5000 150 B 3WL13 50-5@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000
With guide frames, vertical main circuit connectionIII 4000 4000 150 B 3WL13 40-5@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000III 5000 5000 150 B 3WL13 50-5@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000III 6300 6300 150 B 3WL13 63-5@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 166.000
Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional price
Without electronic release AA Without
Electronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NB
Versions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NG
Standard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements for circuit breakers and guide frames, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without
C
© Siemens AG 2009
15
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
4-pole, fixed-mounted versions
15/15Siemens LV 1 · 2009* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
■ Selection and ordering data
For footnotes see page 15/18.
Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.
Rated current1) In
Icu up to 55/66 kA at 500 V,ECO switching capacity N
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx. Order No.
Order No. supplements, see page 15/23
Basic price per PU
A A kA DT kgHorizontal main circuit connectionI 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000Vertical main circuit connectionI 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000II 4000 4000 66 B 3WL12 40-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 103.000Front main circuit connection, single holeI 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000Front main circuit connection, double holeI 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional
price Without electronic release AA WithoutElectronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU15B: Protection functions LI BBETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NB
Versions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NGStandard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without
N
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
4-pole, fixed-mounted versions
15/16 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
15
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
For footnotes see page 15/18.
Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.
Rated current1) In
Icu up to 66/80 kA at 500 V, standard switching capacity S
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx. Order No.
Order No. supplements, see page 15/23
Basic price per PU
A A kA DT kg
Horizontal main circuit connectionI 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000
Vertical main circuit connectionI 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000II 4000 4000 80 B 3WL12 40-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 103.000
Front main circuit connection, single holeI 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000
Front main circuit connection, double holeI 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional
price Without electronic release AA WithoutElectronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU15B: Protection functions LI BBETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NB
Versions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NGStandard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without
S
© Siemens AG 2009
15
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
4-pole, fixed-mounted versions
15/17Siemens LV 1 · 2009* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
For footnotes see page 15/18.
Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.
Rated current1) In
Icu up to 100 kA at 500 V, high switching capacity H
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.Order No.
Order No. supplements, see page 15/23
Basic price per PU
A A kA DT kgHorizontal main circuit connectionII 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000Vertical main circuit connectionII 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000II 4000 4000 100 B 3WL12 40-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 103.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000III 6300 6300 100 B 3WL13 63-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 108.000Front main circuit connection, single holeII 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000Front main circuit connection, double hole II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional
price Without electronic release AA WithoutElectronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU15B: Protection functions LI6) BBETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NB
Versions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NGStandard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without
H
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
4-pole, fixed-mounted versions
15/18 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
15
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Footnotes for pages 15/15 to 15/18:1) The rated current is determined by the rated current module. For the stan-
dard version, the supplied module is equal to the maximum rated current. If a lower rated current is required, adaptation by order code on page 15/24.
2) For permissible rated short-time current Icc and rated short-circuit making capacity Icm for non-automatic air circuit breakers see Technical Informa-tion LV 1T, "Technical specifications".
3) Current transformers for protection of the N conductor and current trans-formers for detection of the ground-fault current in the grounded neutral point of the transformer are to be ordered separately, see page 15/34. The internal current transformers for N conductors can be ordered by adding the supplement "–Z" and the order code "F23", see page 15/26.
4) Current transformers for protection of the N conductor are to be ordered separately, see page 15/34.
5) ETU45B to ETU76B with ground-fault protection module GFM AT (alarm and tripping), see page 15/34.
6) ETU15B cannot be used with 3WL circuit breakers, size III.
Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.
Rated current1) In
Icu up to 130 kA at 500 V, very high switching capacity C
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.Order No.
Order No. supplements, see page 15/23
Basic price per PU
A A kA DT kgHorizontal main circuit connectionIII 4000 4000 130 B 3WL13 40-5@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000III 5000 5000 130 B 3WL13 50-5@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000
Vertical main circuit connectionIII 4000 4000 130 B 3WL13 40-5@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000III 5000 5000 130 B 3WL13 50-5@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000III 6300 6300 130 B 3WL13 63-5@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 108.000Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional
price Without electronic release AA WithoutElectronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NB
Versions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NGStandard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without
C
© Siemens AG 2009
15
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
4-pole, withdrawable versions
15/19Siemens LV 1 · 2009* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
■ Selection and ordering data
For footnotes see page 15/22.
Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.
Rated current1) In
Icu up to 55/66 kA at 500 V,ECO switching capacity N
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx. Order No.
Order No. supplements, see page 15/23
Basic price per PU
A A kA DT kgWithout guide frames (for guide frames, see page 15/30 to 15/33)I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 76.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000With guide frames, horizontal main circuit connectionI 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000With guide frames, vertical main circuit connectionI 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000II 4000 4000 66 B 3WL12 40-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 146.000With guide frames, connecting flangesI 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional
price Without electronic release AA WithoutElectronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU15B: Protection functions LI BBETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NBVersions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NGStandard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements for circuit breakers and guide frames, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without
N
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
4-pole, withdrawable versions
15/20 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
15
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
For footnotes see page 15/22.
Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.
Rated current1) In
Icu up to 66/80 kA at 500 V, standard switching capacity S
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx. Order No.
Order No. supplements, see page 15/23
Basic price per PU
A A kA DT kg
Without guide frames (for guide frames, see page 15/30 to 15/33)I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 76.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000With guide frames, horizontal main circuit connectionI 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000With guide frames, vertical main circuit connectionI 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000II 4000 4000 80 B 3WL12 40-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 146.000With guide frames, connecting flangesI 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional
price Without electronic release AA WithoutElectronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU15B: Protection functions LI BBETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NBVersions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NGStandard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements for circuit breakers and guide frames, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without
S
© Siemens AG 2009
15
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
4-pole, withdrawable versions
15/21Siemens LV 1 · 2009* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
For footnotes see page 15/22.
Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.
Rated current1) In
Icu up to 100 kA at 500 V, high switching capacity H
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.Order No.
Order No. supplements, see page 15/23
Basic price per PU
A A kA DT kgWithout guide frames (for guide frames, see page 15/30 to 15/33)II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 76.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 106.000III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 106.000III 6300 6300 100 B 3WL13 63-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 108.000With guide frames, horizontal main circuit connectionII 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000With guide frames, vertical main circuit connectionII 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000II 4000 4000 100 B 3WL12 40-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 146.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000III 6300 6300 100 B 3WL13 63-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 227.000With guide frames, connecting flangesII 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional
price
Without electronic release AA WithoutElectronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU15B: Protection functions LI6) BBETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NB
Versions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NGStandard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements for circuit breakers and guide frames, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without
H
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
4-pole, withdrawable versions
15/22 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
15
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Footnotes for pages 15/19 to 15/22:1) The rated current is determined by the rated current module. For the stan-
dard version, the supplied module is equal to the maximum rated current. If a lower rated current is required, adaptation by order code on page 15/24.
2) For permissible rated short-time current Icc and rated short-circuit making capacity Icm for non-automatic air circuit breakers see Technical Informa-tion LV 1T, "Technical specifications".
3) Current transformers for protection of the N conductor and current trans-formers for detection of the ground-fault current in the grounded neutral point of the transformer are to be ordered separately, see page 15/34. The internal current transformers for N conductors can be ordered by adding the supplement "–Z" and the order code "F23", see page 15/26.
4) Current transformers for protection of the N conductor are to be ordered separately, see page 15/34.
5) ETU45B to ETU76B with ground-fault protection module GFM AT (alarm and tripping), see page 15/34.
6) ETU15B cannot be used with 3WL circuit breakers, size III.
Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.
Rated current1) In
Icu up to 130 kA at 500 V, very high switching capacity C
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.Order No.
Order No. supplements, see page 15/23
Basic price per PU
A A kA DT kgWithout guide frames (for guide frames, see page 15/30 to 15/33)III 4000 4000 130 B 3WL13 40-5@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 115.000III 5000 5000 130 B 3WL13 50-5@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 106.000III 6300 6300 130 B 3WL13 63-5@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 108.000
With guide frames, horizontal main circuit connectionIII 4000 4000 130 B 3WL13 40-5@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000III 5000 5000 130 B 3WL13 50-5@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000
With guide frames, vertical main circuit connectionIII 4000 4000 130 B 3WL13 40-5@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000III 5000 5000 130 B 3WL13 50-5@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000III 6300 6300 130 B 3WL13 63-5@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 227.000Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional
price Without electronic release AA WithoutElectronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NB
Versions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NGStandard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements for circuit breakers and guide frames, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without
C
© Siemens AG 2009
15
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Options
15/23Siemens LV 1 · 2009
■ Selection and ordering data
Order No. supplement Additional price
3WL 1 . . . - . . . . . -7777
Operating mechanismsManual operating mechanism with mechanical closing 1 Without
Manual operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical closing, closing solenoid suitable for uninterrupted duty, 100 % ON period
Closing solenoid
AC 50/60 Hz V V DC
110 110 ... 125 2230 220 3
Manual/motorized operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical closing, closing solenoid suitable for uninterrupted duty, 100 % ON period
Motor Closing solenoid
AC 50/60 Hz V V DC AC 50/60 Hz V V DC
208 ... 240 220 ... 250 230 220 4110 ... 127 110 ... 125 110 110 ... 125 5-- 24 -- 24 6
To order different voltages for motorized operating mechanism and closing solenoid or closing solenoid for synchronization purposes: "1" at the 13th digit of the Order No. and order codes, see page 15/25.
1st auxiliary release Without 1st auxiliary release A Without
Shunt release suitable for uninterrupted duty, 100 % ON period Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Us AC 50/60 Hz V Us V DC
-- 24 B-- 30 C-- 48 D-- 60 E110 110 ... 125 F230 220 G
2nd auxiliary release Without 2nd auxiliary release A Without
Shunt release suitable for uninterrupted duty, 100 % ON period Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Us AC 50/60 Hz V Us V DC
-- 24 B-- 30 C-- 48 D-- 60 E110 110 ... 125 F230 220 G
Undervoltage release, instantaneous (� 80 ms), short-delay (� 200 ms)Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Us AC 50/60 Hz V Us V DC
-- 24 J-- 30 K-- 48 L-- 60 U110 ... 127 110 ... 125 M208 ... 240 220 ... 250 N380 ... 415 -- P
Undervoltage release, can be delayed between 0.2 s and 3.2 s Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us
Us AC 50/60 Hz V Us V DC
-- 48 Q110 ... 127 110 ... 125 R208 ... 240 220 ... 250 S380 ... 415 -- T
Auxiliary switches 1st auxiliary switch block2 NO + 2 NC 2 Without
1st + 2nd auxiliary switch block4 NO + 4 NC 46 NO + 2 NC 75 NO + 3 NC 8
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Options
15/24 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
15
1) If ordering withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame separately, specify order code "A05" for withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame.
2) Not necessary for circuit breakers with very high switching capacity C as these circuit breakers can be used as standard up to 1150 V AC.
3) Front connections are tinned as standard. 4) The permissible temperature-rise limits according to IEC 60947-2 are 5 K
lower for a tin surface than for a silver surface.
Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. andindicate the appropriate order code(s).
Order No. with "–Z"1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 163WL . . . . - . . . . . - . . . . - Z
Additional price
and additional order code(s)@ @ @ + . . . + . . .
Code for "Further versions"–Z
Operating manualPrinted version
In scope of supply of circuit breaker) French/Italian A 1 1
In scope of supply of circuit breaker) Spanish/Portuguese A 1 2
Rated voltage 1000 V AC/DC Add. price 3-pole
Add. price 4-poleOnly for circuit breakers with high switching capacity H
(8th digit of the Order No. is a "4") Cannot be combined with "Rated voltage 1150 V AC order code "A15".
Size II1) Up to 2000 A A 0 52500 A A 0 53200 A A 0 5
Size III1)2) 4000 A A 0 55000 A A 0 56300 A A 0 5
Rated voltage 1150 V AC/DCOnly for circuit breakers with high switching capacity H (8th digit of the Order No. is a "4") Cannot be combined with "Rated voltage 1000 V AC order code "A05".
Size II Up to 2000 A A 1 52500 A A 1 53200 A A 1 54000 A A 1 5
For size III select a circuit breaker with very high switching capacity C. Tin-plated version of the customer's connections on the guide frame3)4)
Only for circuit breakers in withdrawable version with horizontal connection or flange connection. The normal delivery time increases to 15 work days.
Size I A 0 8Size II A 0 8Size III A 0 8
Special packaging Additional price
Special packaging for extended technical requirements
Cardboard packaging with wax coating (moisture protection), internal bracing, tilt indicators
A 6 0
Rated current modules/rating plugs Additional price
Rated current In A
Only one module is possible per circuit breaker (not in conjunction with electronic release ETU15B). As standard the overcurrent releases are equipped with a rated current module which is equal to the maximum rated cir-cuit breaker current (In max). The rated current of the selected rated current module must be smaller than In max.
For size I, II 250 B 0 2 Without
315 B 0 3 Without
400 B 0 4 Without
500 B 0 5 Without
630 B 0 6 Without
800 B 0 8 Without
1000 B 1 0 Without
For size I, II, III 1250 B 1 2 Without
1600 B 1 6 Without
For size II, III 2000 B 2 0 Without
2500 B 2 5 Without
3200 B 3 2 Without
4000 B 4 0 Without
For size III 5000 B 5 0 Without
6300 B 6 3 Without
© Siemens AG 2009
15
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Options
15/25Siemens LV 1 · 2009
1) Only possible with motorized operating mechanism.2) Not possible with communications interface option, order code "F02" or
"F12".3) Only for circuit breakers with motorized operating mechanism, not possible
with order codes "C11", "C12".
4) Not available for non-automatic air circuit breakers. 5) Overexcited, i.e. opening time 50 ms (standard > 80 ms).6) Only possible if the 14th position of the Order No. for the circuit breaker is
"A", i.e. "without 1st auxiliary release".
Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. andindicate the appropriate order code(s).
Order No. with "–Z"1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 163WL . . . . - . . . . . - . . . . - Z
Additional price
and additional order code(s)@ @ @ + . . . + . . .
Code for "Further versions"–Z
Indication/operator control elements, door sealing frames 5-digit mechanical operating cycles counter1) C 0 1
Electrical ON button in the operator panel2) Possible only for circuit breakers with closing solenoid.
Button with sealing cap C 1 1
Key operation with lock CES C 1 2
Storage status signal switches2) (S21)
1 NO C 2 0
Ready-to-close signal switch (S20) 1 NO C 2 2
Signal switches2) For the first auxiliary release (S22) C 2 6
For the second auxiliary release (S23) C 2 7
Motor shutdown switch in the operator panel3) S 2 5 EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttons Mushroom pushbutton instead of
the mechanical OFF pushbuttonS 2 4
Door sealing frames T 4 0
Reclosing lockouts and remote resets Automatic reset of the reclosing lockout K 0 1
Tripped signal switch2)4) 1 CO K 0 7
Remote reset solenoid for displays and reset buttons including automatic reset of the reclosing lockout
AC 50/60 Hz V V DC
-- 24 K 1 0-- 48 K 1 1120 125 K 1 2208 ... 250 208 ... 250 K 1 3Motorized operating mechanisms and closing/opening solenoids Motorized operating mechanisms Only possible if the 13th digit of the Order No. = "1"
Motor
AC 50/60 Hz V V DC
-- 24 ... 30 M 0 1-- 48 ... 60 M 0 3110 ... 127 110 ... 125 M 0 5208 ... 240 220 ... 250 M 0 6
Closing solenoids suitable for uninterrupted duty, 100 % ON periodOnly possible if the 13th digit of the Order No. = "1"
Activation solenoids
AC 50/60 Hz V V DC
-- 24 M 2 1-- 30 M 2 2-- 48 M 2 3
-- 60 M 2 4110 110 M 2 5230 220 M 2 6
Closing solenoids5) – unsuitable for uninterrupted duty, 5 % ON periodOnly possible if the 13th digit of the Order No. = "1"
Activation solenoids
AC 50/60 Hz V V DC
-- 24 M 3 1-- 48 M 3 3110 ... 127 110 ... 125 M 3 5208 ... 240 220 ... 250 M 3 6
Opening solenoids (shunt releases)6) – not suitable for uninterrupted duty, 5 % ON period
Activation solenoids
AC 50/60 Hz V V DC
-- 24 M 4 1-- 48 M 4 3110 ... 127 110 ... 125 M 4 5208 ... 240 220 ... 250 M 4 6
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Options
15/26 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
15
1) Padlocks not included in scope of supply. 2) If ordering withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame separately, spec-
ify order code "F02" or "F12" for withdrawable circuit breaker only.
3) Additional voltage transformers are required for connection of the measure-ment function Plus, see page 15/43.
Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. andindicate the appropriate order code(s).
Order No. with "–Z"1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 163WL . . . . - . . . . . - . . . . -Zand additional order code(s)
@@@ + . . . + . . .
Additional price
Code for"Further versions" -Z
Order code for fixed-mounted version
Order code for with-drawable version
Interlocks, covers, position indicator switches @ @ @ @ @ @
Mutual mechanical interlockings(interlocking module with Bowden wire 2 m)
Fixed-mounted circuit breaker
For withdrawable circuit breakers with guide frame
For guide frames
For withdrawable circuit breakers
S
--
--
--
5 5 --
R
R
R
--
5
5
5
--
5
6
7
Arc chute covers
Not available for- 1000 V version (order code "A05")- DC version- 4000 A size II
3-poleSize ISize IISize III
------
RRR
111
000
4-poleSize ISize IISize III
------
RRR
111
000
Shutters2-partlockablewith padlocks1)
3-poleSize ISize IISize III
------
RRR
222
111
4-poleSize ISize IISize III
------
RRR
222
111
Position indicator switches for guide frames
Connected position
1 CO
3 CO
Test position
1 CO
2 CO
Discon-nected position1 CO
1 CO
--
--
R
R
1
1
5
6
Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. andindicate the appropriate order code(s).
Order No. with "–Z"1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 163WL . . . . - . . . . . - . . . . - Z
and additional order code(s)
Additional price
@ @ @ + . . . + . . .
Code for "Further versions" -Z
Communication and measurement functionsBreaker status sensor (BSS) F 0 1
PROFIBUS communications interface2) Including COM15 and breaker status sensor (BSS)
F 0 2
MODBUS communications interface2) Including COM16 and breaker status sensor (BSS)
F 1 2
Measurement function Plus (without PROFIBUS/MODBUS communications interface)3)
F 0 5
Overload and short-circuit protection for neutral conductorsInternal current transformers for N conductors Only possible with 4-pole circuit breakers with ETU27B to ETU76B
Size I F 2 3
Size II F 2 3
Size III F 2 3
EMC filtersEMC filters Common-mode interference
suppressor filters (e.g. in IT net-works, caused by frequency converters)Insertion loss (asymmetric) in the range 40 kHz to 10 MHz >40 dB.
F 3 1
© Siemens AG 2009
15
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Options
15/27Siemens LV 1 · 2009
1) Locks must be ordered from the manufacturer.2) Padlock not included in the scope of supply.
Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. and indicate the appropriate order code(s).
Order No. with "–Z"1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 163WL . . . . - . . . . . - . . . . -Zand additional order code(s)
@@@ + . . . + . . .
Code for"Further versions" -Z
Order code for fixed-mounted version
Add. price for fixed-mounted ver-sion
Order code for with-drawable version
Add. price for withdraw-able version
Locking devices @ @ @ @ @ @
Locking devices against unauthorized closing, in the operator panelThe disconnector unit fulfills the requirements for main circuit break-ers acc. to EN 60204-1
Made by CES
Made by IKON
Assembly kit FORTRESS or Castell1)
Assembly kit for padlocks2)
Made by Ronis
Made by Profalux
S
S
S
S
S
S
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
3
5
7
8
9
S
S
S
S
S
S
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
3
5
7
8
9
EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttons Mushroom pushbutton instead of the mechanical OFF pushbutton
S 2 4 S 2 4
Locking devices against unauthorized closing, for withdrawable circuit breakersThe disconnector unit fulfills the requirements for main circuit breakers acc. to EN 60204-1, consisting of a lock in the cabinet door, active in the connected position;the function is retained when the cir-cuit breaker is replaced
Made by CES
Made by Ronis
Made by Profalux
--
--
--
R
R
R
6
6
6
1
8
0
Locking devices for operating mechanism handles with padlock2)
S 3 3 S 3 3
Locking devices to prevent movement of the withdrawable circuit breakersSafety lock for mounting on the circuit breaker
Made by CES
Made by Profalux
Made by Ronis
--
--
--
S
S
S
7
7
7
1
5
6
Locking mechanisms Locking mechanisms to prevent movement of the withdrawable circuit breaker in disconnected positions, consisting of Bowden wire and lock in the cabinet door
Not possible in combination with order code "R30" or "R50".
Made by CES
Made by Profalux
Made by Ronis
--
--
--
R
R
R
8
8
8
1
5
6
Locking mechanisms
Not possible in combination with order code "R81", "R85" or "R86".
To prevent opening of the cabinet door in: ON position (fixed-mounted version)/in connected position (withdrawable version)
To prevent movement with the cabinet door open
S
--
3 0 R
R
3
5
0
0
Connection methods for auxiliary conductorsConnections for screwless terminals (tension spring)
N 6 1 P 6 1
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Options
15/28 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
15
1) Only horizontal connection and vertical connection are available for circuit breakers with very high switching capacity C.
Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. andindicate the appropriate order code(s).
Order No. with "–Z"1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 163WL . . . . - . . . . . - . . . . -Zand additional order code(s)@ @ @
+ . . . + . . .
Code for "Further versions"–Z
For withdrawable circuit breakers with guide frames or for guide frames1)
Add. price 3-pole
Add. price 4-pole
To select this connection method, the 12th digit of the Order No. for the circuit breaker must be a "6"
Connection methods for main circuit connections
Top and bottom: accessible from front, single hole
Size I, up to 1600 ASize II, up to 2000 ASize II, up to 2500 ASize II, up to 3200 ASize III, up to 4000 A
PPPPP
00000
00000
Top and bottom: accessible from front, double hole
Size I, up to 1600 ASize II, up to 2000 ASize II, up to 2500 ASize II, up to 3200 ASize III, up to 4000 A
PPPPP
00000
11111
Top: horizontal, double holeBottom: accessible from front, single hole
Size I, up to 1600 ASize II, up to 2000 ASize II, up to 2500 ASize II, up to 3200 ASize III, up to 4000 A
PPPPP
00000
77777
Top: verticalBottom: horizontal
Size I, up to 1600 ASize II, up to 2000 ASize II, up to 2500 ASize II, up to 3200 ASize III, up to 4000 ASize III, up to 5000 A
PPPPPP
111111
888888
Top: connecting flangeBottom: horizontal
Size I, up to 1600 ASize II, up to 2000 ASize II, up to 2500 ASize II, up to 3200 ASize III, up to 4000 A
PPPPP
11111
99999
Top: horizontalBottom: vertical
Size I, up to 1600 ASize II, up to 2000 ASize II, up to 2500 ASize II, up to 3200 ASize III, up to 4000 ASize III, up to 5000 A
PPPPPP
222222
333333
For fixed-mounted circuit breakers Add. price 3-pole
Add. price 4-pole
To select this connection method, the 12th digit of the Order No. for the circuit breaker must be a "2"
Connection methods for main circuit connections
Top: horizontalBottom: accessible from front, single hole
Size I, up to 1600 ASize II, up to 2000 ASize II, up to 2500 ASize II, up to 3200 ASize III, up to 4000 A
NNNNN
11111
11111
Top: vertical Bottom: horizontal
Size I, up to 1600 ASize II, up to 2000 ASize II, up to 2500 ASize II, up to 3200 ASize III, up to 4000 ASize III, up to 5000 A
NNNNNN
222222
000000
Top: horizontalBottom: vertical
Size I, up to 1600 ASize II, up to 2000 ASize II, up to 2500 ASize II, up to 3200 ASize III, up to 4000 ASize III, up to 5000 A
NNNNNN
222222
444444
© Siemens AG 2009
15
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Accessories and spare parts
15/29Siemens LV 1 · 2009
■ Overview
Determination of the number of auxiliary supply connectors required
For ordering the auxiliary supply connectors see under "Accessories and Spare Parts, Guide Frames for AC Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers", pages 15/30 to 15/33 and under "Accessories and Spare Parts, Auxiliary Conductor Connections, Auxiliary Supply Connectors", page 15/39.
This selection is only required if the guide frame is ordered under a separate Order No.
The required number of auxiliary supply connectors depends on: • Operating mechanism type• Electronic trip unit with/without current transformer• Type and number of auxiliary releases• Number of auxiliary switches• COM15/COM16 communication interface
Number of auxil-iary supply connectors
Terminal
a First auxiliary supply connector X6 always required. 1 X6
b b1 b2 b3
Operating mechanisms Manual operating mechanism with stored-energy feature with mechanical closing Manual operating mechanism with stored-energy feature with mechanical and electrical closingManual/motorized operating mechanism with stored-energy feature with mechanical and electrical closing
0 0
+1X6 X5
c c1 c2
c3 c4
Electronic trip units Electronic trip units ETU15B, ETU25B, ETU27B Electronic trip units ETU45B, ETU76B (internal CubicleBUS)
Connections for external current transformers for overload protection in the N conductor and ground-fault protection Current transformer installed in the N conductor (required with 3-pole circuit breakers if c2 is not selected)Current transformer in the neutral point of the transformer (required if c2 or c3 is not selected)
0+1
+1+1
X8
X8 X8
d d1 d2
Auxiliary releases With/without 1st auxiliary release (shunt trip unit F1) 2nd auxiliary release (shunt trip unit F2, undervoltage trip unit F3, delayable undervoltage trip unit F4)
0+1
X6 X5
e e1 e2
Auxiliary switch blocks 1st auxiliary switch block 2 NO + 2 NC 1st and 2nd auxiliary switch block 4 NO + 4 NC or 6 NO + 2 NC or 5 NO + 3 NC (required if b3 or d2 is not selected)
0 +1
X6 X5
f f1 f2
Communication modules Without communication module COM15/COM16 With communication module COM15/COM16 – occupies the entire terminal strip X7, making the following options no longer possible: • Tripped signal switch S24 • Stored-energy status indication S21 • Electrical ON button S10 • Signaling switch on first and second auxiliary release S22 + S23
0+1 X7
g g1 g2 g3 g4
g5
g6 g7 g8
Optional signals/accessories Tripped signal switch S24 (only possible if f2 is not selected) Stored-energy status indication S21 (only possible if f2 is not selected, required if g1 is not selected) Electrical ON button S10 (only possible if f2 is not selected, required if g1 or g2 is not selected) Signal switch on first auxiliary release S22 (only possible if f2 is not selected, required if g1, g2 or g3 is not selected) Signal switch on second auxiliary release S23 (only possible if f2 is not selected, required if g1, g2, g3 or g4 is not selected)
Ready-to-close indicator switch S20 Motor shutdown switch S12 (only possible if motorized operating mechanism is selected) Remote reset solenoid F7 (required if c2 is not selected)
+1+1+1+1
+1
00
+1
X7 X7 X7 X7
X7
X6 X5 X8
h Total number of auxiliary supply connectors (max. 4)
NS
E0_
0110
4
X8X7 X6 X5
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Accessories and spare parts
15/30 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
15
■ Selection and ordering dataGuide frames for AC circuit breakers/non-automatic air circuit breakers
For main circuit connection vertical and main circuit connecting flange see the following page. All other accessory parts must be ordered by specifying "–Z" and the corresponding order code, see pages 15/24 to 15/24.1) Front connections are tinned as standard.
2) The permissible temperature-rise limits according to IEC 60947-2 are 5 K lower for a tin surface than for a silver surface.
Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.
Switching capacity Icu
DT Guide frames for 3-pole circuit breakers/ non-automatic air circuit breakers
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.Order No.
(Order No. supplements required according to table below)
Basic price per PU
A kA kg
Front main circuit connection, single holeI 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1AA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2AA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3AA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31.000II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4AA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 39.000II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5AA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 45.000III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6AA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60.000
Front main circuit connection, double holeI 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1AB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2AB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3AB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31.000II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4AB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 39.000II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5AB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 45.000III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6AB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60.000
Horizontal main circuit connectionI 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1AC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2AC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3AC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31.000II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4AC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 39.000II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5AC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 45.000III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6AC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60.000III 5000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-7AC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60.000III 4000 ... 150 B 3WL9 213-6AC@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 63.000III 5000 ... 150 B 3WL9 213-7AC@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 63.000
Number of auxiliary supply connectors Order No. supplements Add. price
Without1 connector2 connectors3 connectors4 connectorsFor required number of auxiliary supply connectors, see table on page 15/29
01234
Without
Type of auxiliary circuit connectionsWithoutWith screw connections (SIGUT)With screwless connection method (tension spring)
012
Without
Position indicator switchesWithout 0 WithoutOption 1 Connected position 1 CO contact,
test position 1 CO contact,disconnected position 1 CO contact
1
Option 2 Connected position 3 CO contacts,test position 2 CO contacts,disconnected position 1 CO contact
2
ShuttersWithoutWith shutter, 2-part,lockable
Size ISize IISize III
AB
Without
Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. and indicate the appropriate order code(s).
Order No. with "–Z" and additional order code
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 163WL9 2 1 . – . . . . . – . . . . –Z@@@
Additional price
Rated voltage 1000 V ACSize II, except 4000 A (switching capacity H) A 0 5Size III, not necessary with with very high switching capacity A 0 5
Rated voltage 1150 V ACSize II, except 4000 A (switching capacity H) A 1 5
Tinned version of the customer's connections on the guide frame1)2)
Only for guide frames with horizontal connection or flange connectionSize I A 0 8Size II A 0 8Size III A 0 8
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2009
15
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Accessories and spare parts
15/31Siemens LV 1 · 2009
For main circuit connection front, single hole, main circuit connection front, double hole, and main circuit connection horizontal see the previous page. All other accessory parts must be ordered by specifying "–Z" and the corresponding order code, see pages 15/24 to 15/28.1) Front connections are tinned as standard.
2) The permissible temperature-rise limits according to IEC 60947-2 are 5 K lower for a tin surface than for a silver surface.
Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.
Switching capacity Icu
DT Guide frames for 3-pole circuit breakers/ non-automatic air circuit breakers
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.Order No.
(Order No. supplements required according to table below)
Basic price per PU
A kA kg
Vertical main circuit connectionI 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31.000II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 39.000II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 45.000II 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-6AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 52.000III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60.000III 5000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-7AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60.000III 6300 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-8AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 70.000III 4000 ... 150 B 3WL9 213-6AD@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 63.000III 5000 ... 150 B 3WL9 213-7AD@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 63.000III 6300 ... 150 B 3WL9 213-8AD@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 74.000
Main circuit connection connecting flangesI 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1AE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2AE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3AE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31.000II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4AE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 39.000II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5AE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 45.000III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6AE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60.000
Number of auxiliary supply connectors Order No. supplements Add. price
Without1 connector2 connectors3 connectors4 connectorsFor required number of auxiliary supply connectors, see table on page 15/29
01234
Without
Type of auxiliary circuit connectionsWithoutWith screw connections (SIGUT)With screwless connection method (tension spring)
012
Without
Position indicator switchesWithout 0 WithoutOption 1 Connected position 1 CO contact,
test position 1 CO contact,disconnected position 1 CO contact
1
Option 2 Connected position 3 CO contacts,test position 2 CO contacts,disconnected position 1 CO contact
2
ShuttersWithoutWith shutter, 2-part,lockable
Size ISize IISize III
AB
Without
Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. and indicate the appropriate order code(s).
Order No. with "–Z" and additional order code
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 163WL9 2 1 . – . . . . . – . . . . –Z@@@
Additional price
Rated voltage 1000 V ACSize II, except 4000 A (switching capacity H) A 0 5Size III, not necessary with circuit breakers with very high switching capacity A 0 5
Rated voltage 1150 V ACSize II, except 4000 A (switching capacity H) A 1 5
Tinned version of the customer's connections on the guide frame1)2)
Only for guide frames with horizontal connection or flange connectionSize I A 0 8Size II A 0 8Size III A 0 8
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Accessories and spare parts
15/32 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
15
For main circuit connection vertical and main circuit connecting flange see the following page. All other accessory parts must be ordered by specifying "–Z" and the corresponding order code, see pages 15/24 to 15/28.1) Front connections are tinned as standard.
2) The permissible temperature-rise limits according to IEC 60947-2 are 5 K lower for a tin surface than for a silver surface.
Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.
Switching capacity Icu
DT Guide frames for 4-pole circuit breakers/ non-automatic air circuit breakers
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx. Order No.
(Order No. supplements required according to table below)
Basic price per PU
A kA kg
Front main circuit connection, single holeI 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1BA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2BA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3BA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37.000II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4BA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 47.000II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5BA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 54.000III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6BA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84.000
Front main circuit connection, double holeI 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1BB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2BB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3BB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37.000II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4BB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 47.000II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5BB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 54.000III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6BB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84.000
Horizontal main circuit connectionI 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1BC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2BC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3BC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37.000II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4BC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 47.000II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5BC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 54.000III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6BC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84.000III 5000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-7BC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84.000III 4000 ... 130 B 3WL9 213-6BC@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 87.000III 5000 ... 130 B 3WL9 213-7BC@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 87.000
Number of auxiliary supply connectors Order No. supplements Add. price
Without1 connector2 connectors3 connectors4 connectorsFor required number of auxiliary supply connectors, see table on page 15/29
01234
Without
Type of auxiliary circuit connectionsWithoutWith screw connections (SIGUT)With screwless connection method (tension spring)
012
Without
Position indicator switchesWithout 0 WithoutOption 1 Connected position 1 CO contact,
test position 1 CO contact,disconnected position 1 CO contact
1
Option 2 Connected position 3 CO contacts,test position 2 CO contacts,disconnected position 1 CO contact
2
ShuttersWithoutWith shutter, 2-part,lockable
Size ISize IISize III
AB
Without
Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. and indicate the appropriate order code(s).
Order No. with "–Z" and additional order code
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 163WL9 2 1 . – . . . . . – . . . . –Z@@@
Additional price
Rated voltage 1000 V ACSize II, except 4000 A (switching capacity H) A 0 5Size III, not necessary with circuit breakers with very high switching capacity A 0 5
Rated voltage 1150 V ACSize II, except 4000 A (switching capacity H) A 1 5
Tinned version of the customer's connections on the guide frame1)2)
Only for guide frames with horizontal connection or flange connectionSize I A 0 8Size II A 0 8Size III A 0 8
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2009
15
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Accessories and spare parts
15/33Siemens LV 1 · 2009
For main circuit connection front, single hole, main circuit connection front, double hole, and main circuit connection horizontal see the previous page. All other accessory parts must be ordered by specifying "–Z" and the corresponding order code, see pages 15/24 to 15/28.1) Front connections are tinned as standard.
2) The permissible temperature-rise limits according to IEC 60947-2 are 5 K lower for a tin surface than for a silver surface.
Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.
Switching capacity Icu
DT Guide frames for 4-pole circuit breakers/ non-automatic air circuit breakers
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx. Order No.
(Order No. supplements required according to table below)
Basic price per PU
A kA kg
Vertical main circuit connectionI 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37.000II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 47.000II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 54.000II 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-6BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 62.000III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84.000III 5000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-7BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84.000III 6300 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-8BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 119.000III 4000 ... 130 B 3WL9 213-6BD@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 88.000III 5000 ... 130 B 3WL9 213-7BD@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 88.000III 6300 ... 130 B 3WL9 213-8BD@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 124.000
Main circuit connection connecting flangesI 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1BE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2BE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3BE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37.000II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4BE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 47.000II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5BE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 54.000III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6BE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84.000
Number of auxiliary supply connectors Order No. supplements Add. price
Without1 connector2 connectors3 connectors4 connectorsFor required number of auxiliary supply connectors, see table on page 15/29
01234
Without
Type of auxiliary circuit connectionsWithoutWith screw connections (SIGUT)With screwless connection method (tension spring)
012
Without
Position indicator switchesWithout 0 WithoutOption 1 Connected position 1 CO contact,
test position 1 CO contact,disconnected position 1 CO contact
1
Option 2 Connected position 3 CO contacts,test position 2 CO contacts,disconnected position 1 CO contact
2
ShuttersWithoutWith shutter, 2-part,lockable
Size ISize IISize III
AB
Without
Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. and indicate the appropriate order code(s).
Order No. with "–Z" and additional order code
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 163WL9 2 1 . – . . . . . – . . . . –Z@@@
Additional price
Rated voltage 1000 V ACSize II, except 4000 A (switching capacity H) A 0 5Size III, not necessary with circuit breakers with very high switching capacity A 0 5
Rated voltage 1150 V ACSize II, except 4000 A (switching capacity H) A 1 5
Tinned version of the customer's connections on the guide frame1)2)
Only for guide frames with horizontal connection or flange connectionSize I A 0 8Size II A 0 8Size III A 0 8
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Accessories and spare parts
15/34 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
15
1) For replacement in existing circuit breakers please specify the circuit breaker ID No. when ordering.
2) With the rated current module selected, the maximum rated current In max of the circuit breaker must not be exceeded. The following applies In � In max.
3) For direct measurement of the ground-fault current, e.g. in the neutral point of the transformer, a 1200 A/1 A current transformer, class 1, is required. The internal load of the SENTRON 3WL is 0.11 m. If the ground-fault cur-rent is to be determined using the vectorial sum of the phases, a current transformer must be installed in the neutral conductor.
Designation DT Order No. Price per PU
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.
kgProtective devices with device holder and optional measurement function1)
Type With protection function
Measurement function
ETU15B LI Without C 3WL9 311-5AA00-0AA2 1 1 unit 103 0.720
ETU25B LSI Without C 3WL9 312-5AA00-0AA2 1 1 unit 103 0.720
ETU27B LSING Without C 3WL9 312-7AA00-0AA2 1 1 unit 103 0.720
ETU45B LSIN(G) Without C 3WL9 314-5AA00-0AA2 1 1 unit 103 0.720(without display)
With measurement function Plus
B 3WL9 314-5AA20-0AA2 1 1 unit 103 0.720
ETU76B LSIN(G) Without C 3WL9 317-6AA00-0AA2 1 1 unit 103 0.720With measurement function Plus
B 3WL9 317-6AA20-0AA2 1 1 unit 103 0.720
Rated current modules/Rating plugs2)
For size Rated current In (A)
I, II 250 B 3WL9 111-0AA51-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010315 B 3WL9 111-0AA52-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010400 B 3WL9 111-0AA53-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010500 B 3WL9 111-0AA54-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
630 B 3WL9 111-0AA55-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010800 B 3WL9 111-0AA56-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
1000 B 3WL9 111-0AA57-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
I, II, III 1250 B 3WL9 111-0AA58-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.0101600 B 3WL9 111-0AA61-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
II, III 2000 B 3WL9 111-0AA62-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.0102500 B 3WL9 111-0AA63-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.0103200 B 3WL9 111-0AA64-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.0104000 B 3WL9 111-0AA65-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
III 5000 B 3WL9 111-0AA66-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.0106300 B 3WL9 111-0AA67-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
Ground-fault modules3)
GFM AT 45B (only for ETU45B) alarm and tripping B 3WL9 111-0AT53-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.030
GFM AT 55B–76B (only for ETU76B) alarm and tripping B 3WL9 111-0AT56-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.030
Displays4-line displays for ETU45B B 3WL9 111-0AT81-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.060
Current transformers for N conductor protectionInternal transf. for N conductors Size I B 3WL9 111-0AA11-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200(not for ETU release 2) Size II B 3WL9 111-0AA12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.280Including wiring kit Size III B 3WL9 111-0AA13-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.500
Internal transf. for N conductors Size I B 3WL9 111-0AA14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200Only for ETU release 2 Size II B 3WL9 111-0AA15-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.280Including wiring kit Size III B 3WL9 111-0AA16-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.500
External transf. for N conductors(T5, see Technical Information LV 1 T, "Functions", "Measurement Method")
Size I B 3WL9 111-0AA21-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.300Size II B 3WL9 111-0AA22-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.380Size III B 3WL9 111-0AA23-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.680
External transf. for N conductorsWith copper connection pieces (T5, see Technical Information LV 1 T, "Functions", "Measurement Method")
Size I B 3WL9 111-0AA31-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.600Size II B 3WL9 111-0AA32-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 4.260Size III B 3WL9 111-0AA33-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 8.500
EMC filtersEMC filtersCommon-mode interference sup-pressor filters (e.g. in IT networks, caused by frequency converters)Insertion loss (asymmetric) in the range 40 kHz to 10 MHz >40 dB
Not for ETU release 2 X 3WL9 111-0AK32-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.280
Only for ETU release 2 X 3WL9 111-0AK34-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.280
NS
E0_
0161
0b
3WL9 31.-.AA.0-0AA1
� � � � � � �
� � � � � � � � � � �
3WL9 111-0AA64-0AA0
� �
� � � � � � � � � �
� �
� �
�
�
� �
� �
�
�
� �
� �
� � � � � �
�
� �
� � � � � � � � � �
� � � � � � � � �
� � � �
� �
�
�
�
��
� � � ��
3WL9 111-0AT53-0AA0
� � � � � � � � � �
3WL9 111-0AT81-0AA0
� � � � � � � � � �
3WL9 111-0AA2.-0AA0
� � � � � � � � � �
3WL9 111-0AA3.-0AA0
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2009
15
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Accessories and spare parts
15/35Siemens LV 1 · 2009
1) Can only be used in conjunction with "automatic reset of reclosing lockout", e.g. "–Z" + "K01", 3WL9 111-0AK21-0AA0.
2) Required if communication is retrofitted.
3) Locks must be ordered from the manufacturer.4) Padlock not included in the scope of supply.■ Start of delivery on request.
Designation DT Order No. Price per PU
PU (UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.
kg
More accessories for electronic releases Sealable covers For ETU15B to
ETU45B
For ETU76
B
B
3WL9 111-0AT45-0AA0
3WL9 111-0AT46-0AA0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
103
103
0.050
0.050
Automatic reset of the reclosing lockout Spare part for option K01, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/25.
B 3WL9 111-0AK21-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.050
Remote reset solenoids1) 24 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AK03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200For mechanical tripped indicator
Spare part for option K10 to K13, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/25.
48 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AK04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200
120 V AC/125 V DC
B 3WL9 111-0AK05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200
208-250 V AC/208-250 V DC
B 3WL9 111-0AK06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200
Retrofittable internal CubicleBUS wiring for connection to terminal X8 (without male connector2))
For ETU45B and ETU76B
B 3WL9 111-0AK30-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.150
Retrofittable internal wiring for connection of the external N- and G-transformers to terminal X8 (without male connector, not for ETU release 2)
D 3WL9 111-0AK31-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.020
Retrofittable internal wiring for connection of the external N- and G-transformers to terminal X8 for ETU release 2 (without male connector)
D 3WL9 111-0AK33-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.020
Locking devicesProtective covers for mechanical ON/OFF Consisting of 2 transparent covers each for sealing or for attaching padlocks4), cover with 6.35 mm hole (for tool actua-tion), lock mount for safety lock for key operation
Without safety lockMade by CESMade by IKON
B
BB
3WL9 111-0BA21-0AA0
3WL9 111-0BA22-0AA03WL9 111-0BA24-0AA0
1
11
1 unit
1 unit1 unit
103
103103
0.100
0.3000.300
Locking devices against unauthorized closing, in the operator panelThe disconnector unit fulfills the ■ requirements for main circuit breakers according to EN 60204-1
Spare part for option S01 to S09, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/27.
Assembly kit FORTRESS or CASTELL3)
Made by RonisMade by KIRK-KeyMade by Profalux
Made by CESMade by IKONAssembly kit for padlocks4)
B
BB
B
BB
B
3WL9 111-0BA31-0AA0
3WL9 111-0BA33-0AA03WL9 111-0BA34-0AA0
3WL9 111-0BA35-0AA0
3WL9 111-0BA36-0AA03WL9 111-0BA38-0AA0
3WL9 111-0BA41-0AA0
1
111
11
1
1 unit
1 unit1 unit1 unit
1 unit1 unit
1 unit
103
103103103
103103
103
0.200
0.4000.2700.250
0.2000.200
0.360
Locking devices against unauthorized closing, for withdrawable circuit breakers ■The disconnector unit fulfills the require-ments for main circuit breakers accord-ing to EN 60204-1, consisting of lock in the cabinet door, active in connected position; function is retained when circuit breaker is replaced
Spare part for option R60, R61, R68, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/27.
Made by CESMade by IKONMade by KIRK-KeyMade by RonisMade by Profalux
BBB
BB
3WL9 111-0BA51-0AA03WL9 111-0BA53-0AA03WL9 111-0BA57-0AA0
3WL9 111-0BA58-0AA03WL9 111-0BA50-0AA0
11111
1 unit1 unit1 unit1 unit1 unit
103103103103103
0.3000.3000.3000.3000.227
Locking devices for operating mecha-nism handle with padlock4)
Spare part for option S33, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/27.
B 3WL9 111-0BA71-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.080
Locking devices against movement of the withdrawable circuit breakers Safety lock for mounting on the circuit breaker.
Spare part for opt. S71, S75, S76, ■see "-Z" + order code, page 15/27.
Made by CESMade by IKONMade by ProfaluxMade by Ronis
Made by KIRK-Key
BBBB
B
3WL9 111-0BA73-0AA03WL9 111-0BA75-0AA03WL9 111-0BA76-0AA03WL9 111-0BA77-0AA0
3WL9 111-0BA80-0AA0
1111
1
1 unit1 unit1 unit1 unit
1 unit
103103103103
103
0.3000.2000.3000.300
0.400
Interlocking systems 2 of the same keys for 3 switches, Locking device OFF position, Key-operated switch on operator panel. A maximum of 2 switches can be switched on.
Made by CES B 3WL9 111-0BA43-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.360
ETU25B
NS
E0_
0098
3b
3WL9 111-0AT45-0AA0
�
� � � � � � � � � �
3WL9 111-0AK0.-0AA0
��
��
��
��
3WL9 111-0BA22-0AA0
��������
3WL9 111-0BA31-0AA0
�������
3WL9 111-0BA53-0AA0
�������
3WL9 111-0BA71-0AA0
��������
3WL9 111-0BA76-0AA0
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Accessories and spare parts
15/36 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
15
Designation DT Order No. Price per PU
PU (UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.
kg
Locking mechanisms
Interlocking
To prevent movement of the withdrawable circuit breakers in disconnected position, consisting of Bowden wire and lock in the cabinet door
Spare part for option R81, R85, R86, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/27.
Not possible in combination with "Locking mechanism to prevent opening of the cabinet door" (order code "R30") or "Locking mechanism to prevent move-ment with the cabinet door open" (order code "R50").
Made by CESMade by IKONMade by ProfaluxMade by Ronis
BBBB
3WL9 111-0BA81-0AA03WL9 111-0BA83-0AA03WL9 111-0BA85-0AA03WL9 111-0BA86-0AA0
1111
1 unit1 unit1 unit1 unit
103103103103
0.8000.8000.8000.800
To prevent opening of the cabinet door in ON position (can be defeated)
Spare part for option S30, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/27.
Fixed mounting B 3WL9 111-0BB12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.600
To prevent opening of the cabinet door (can be defeated)
Spare part for option R30, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/27.
Not possible in combination with "Locking mechanism to prevent movement of the withdrawable circuit breakers in disconnected position" (order codes "R81", "R85" or "R86").
Guide frames B 3WL9 111-0BB13-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.150
To prevent movement with the cabinet door open
Spare part for option R50, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/27.
Not possible in combination with "Locking mechanism to prevent movement of the withdrawable circuit breakers in disconnected position" (order codes "R81", "R85" or "R86").
Guide frames B 3WL9 111-0BB15-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.150
Interlocks Mutual mechanical interlocking, with 2000 mm Bowden wire(one required for each circuit breaker)
Fixed-mounted circuit breaker
Spare part for option S55, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/26.
B 3WL9 111-0BB21-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.700
Module for withdrawable circuit breaker with frame
Spare part for option R55, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/26.
B 3WL9 111-0BB24-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.130
When ordered separately
Module for guide frame
Spare part for option R56, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/26.
B 3WL9 111-0BB22-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.100
Module for withdrawable circuit breaker
Spare part for option R57, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/26.
B 3WL9 111-0BB23-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.150
Adapter for size IIIWithdrawable circuit breaker
B 3WL9 111-0BB30-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.100
Couplings on the circuit breaker (with ring) for mutual interlocking Can be used in all circuit breakers
B 3WL9 112-8AH47-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.160
Bowden wires 2000 mm B 3WL9 111-0BB45-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.1503000 mm B 3WL9 111-0BB46-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.2204500 mm B 3WL9 111-0BB47-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.360
��������
3WL9 111-0BA83-0AA0
3WL9 111-0BB12-0AA0
��������
3WL9 111-0BB21-0AA0
NSE0_01886
3WL9 112-8HA47-0AA0
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2009
15
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Accessories and spare parts
15/37Siemens LV 1 · 2009
Designation DT Order No. Price per PU
PU (UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.
kg
Test devicesManual testers release 2 for electronic releases ETU15B to ETU76B
For testing the electronic release functions
B 3WL9 111-0AT32-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.100
Function testers C 3WL9 111-0AT44-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 8.210For testing the tripping characteristics for electronic release ETU15B to ETU76B
Capacitor storage devicesCapacitor storage devices For shunt release
Storage time 5 min
Rated control supply voltage must match the rated control supply voltage of the shunt release
Rated control supply voltage/rated opera-tional voltage
AC 50/60 Hz V V DC
220 ... 240 220 ... 250
B 3WL9 111-0BA14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.520
Suitable also for 3VL and 3WN circuit breakers
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Accessories and spare parts
15/38 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
15
1) Not possible with communications interface option, order code "F02" or "F12".
2) X7 manual connector required for circuit breakers or guide frames. If this is not already available, please order additionally (see pages 15/29 and 15/39).
3) Only in conjunction with motorized operating mechanism.4) Not possible with motor shutdown switch.5) Not possible with electrical ON button.
Designation DT Order No. Price per PU
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.
kg
Indicators, control elements Ready-to-close signal-ing switches1 NO contact
Spare part for option C22, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/25.
B 3WL9 111-0AH01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.020
Signaling switches1)2)
Spare part for option C26 and C27, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/25.
1st or 2nd auxiliary releases
B 3WL9 111-0AH02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.020
Tripped signaling switches1)2)
1 CO
Spare part for option K07, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/25.
B 3WL9 111-0AH14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.080
Operating cycles counters, mechanical3)
Spare part for option C01, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/25.
B 3WL9 111-0AH07-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.100
Stored energy status signaling switches1)2)
1 NO contact
Spare part for option C20, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/25.
B 3WL9 111-0AH08-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.030
Position signaling switches for guide frames
Spare part for option R15 and R16, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/26.
1st block (3 CO contacts)
B 3WL9 111-0AH11-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200
2nd block (6 CO contacts)
B 3WL9 111-0AH12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.400
Electrical ON buttons1)4)
(button+wiring)2), for operator panel. Possible only for circuit breakers with closing solenoid.
Spare part for option C11 and C12, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/25.
With sealing cap B 3WL9 111-0AJ02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.150
With CES assembly kit B 3WL9 111-0AJ03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.140
With BKS assembly kit B 3WL9 111-0AJ04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.140
With IKON assembly kit B 3WL9 111-0AJ05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.140
Motor shutdown switches5) (mounting on operator panel)
Spare part for option S25, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/25.
B 3WL9 111-0AJ06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.100
EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttonsMushroom pushbutton instead of the mechanical OFF pushbutton
Spare part for option S24, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/25.
B 3WL9 111-0BA72-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.080
� � � � � � � � � �
3WL9 111-0AH01-0AA0
����������
3WL9 111-0AH02-0AA0
� � � � � � � � � �
3WL9 111-0AH07-0AA0
� � � � � � � � �
3WL9 111-0AH12-0AA0
� � � � � � � � �
3WL9 111-0AJ0.-0AA0
��������
3WL9 111-0BA72-0AA0
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2009
15
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Accessories and spare parts
15/39Siemens LV 1 · 2009
For a complete auxiliary current connection you must order:
Fixed-mounted version: $ + % + &
Withdrawable version: $ + ( + %
or
$ + )
Designation DT Order No. Price per PU
PU (UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.
kg
Auxiliary conductor connections Male connectors for circuit breakers $ B 3WL9 111-0AB01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.100
Extension for the 1000 V male connector versions (male connector must be ordered separately)
B 3WL9 111-0AB02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.150
Male connectors and extension for 1000 V B 3WL9 111-0AB10-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.000
Auxiliary supply connec-tors for circuit breakers or guide frames%
Screw connection (SIGUT)
B 3WL9 111-0AB03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.070
Screwless connection method (tension spring)
B 3WL9 111-0AB04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.070
Coding kits for fixed-mounted version (X5 to X8) &
B 3WL9 111-0AB07-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.020
Sliding contact modules for guide frames ( B 3WL9 111-0AB08-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.100
One-part sliding contact modules for guide frames Screw connection (SIGUT))
B 3WL9 111-0AB18-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.120
Blanking blocks for circuit breakers B 3WL9 111-0AB12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.030
��
�����
3WL9 111-0AB01-0AA0
��������
3WL9 111-0AB03-0AA0
���������
3WL9 111-0AB04-0AA0
��
������
3WL9 111-0AB07-0AA0
�
���������
3WL9 111-0AB08-0AA0
�����
���
3WL9 111-0AB18-0AA0
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Accessories and spare parts
15/40 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
15
1) X7 manual connector required for circuit breakers or guide frames. If this is not already available, please order additionally (see pages 15/29 and 15/39).
Designation DT Order No. Price per PU
PU (UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.
kg
Auxiliary releases Closing solenoids/shunt releases
24 V DC 100 % ON period B 3WL9 111-0AD01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700
30 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AD02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700
48 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AD03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700
60 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AD04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700
110 ... 125 V DC/110 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AD05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700
220 V DC/230 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AD06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700
24 V DC 5 % ON period B 3WL9 111-0AD11-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700
48 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AD12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700
110 ... 125 V DC/110 ... 127 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AD13-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700
220 ... 250 V DC/208 ... 240 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AD14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.800
Undervoltage releases
Instantaneous
24 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AE01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.730
30 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AE02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.730
48 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AE03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.730
60 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AE07-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.730
110 ... 125 V DC/110 ... 127 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AE04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.730
220 ... 250 V DC/208 ... 240 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AE05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.730
380 ... 415 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AE06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.730
Delayed
48 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AE11-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.740
110 ... 125 V DC/110 ... 127 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AE12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.740
220 ... 250 V DC/208 ... 240 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AE13-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.740
380 ... 415 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AE14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.740
Operating mechanisms Motorized operating mechanisms1)
24 ... 30 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AF01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.510
48 ... 60 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AF02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.510
110 ... 125 V DC/110 ... 127 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AF03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.510
220 ... 250 V DC/208 ... 240 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AF04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.510
Auxiliary contacts Auxiliary switch blocks 2 NO + 2 NC B 3WL9 111-0AG01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.180
2 NO B 3WL9 111-0AG02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.080
1 NO + 1 NC B 3WL9 111-0AG03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.070
3WL9 111-0AD06-0AA0
��������
3WL9 111-0AE0.-0AA0
��������
3WL9 111-0AE1.-0AA0
�
� � � � � � � � �
3WL9 111-0AF0.-0AA0
3WL9 111-0AG03-0AA0
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2009
15
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Accessories and spare parts
15/41Siemens LV 1 · 2009
1) Not available for 1000 V version, 1150 V version, DC version and size II with rated circuit breaker current of 4000 A.
Designation DT Order No. Price per PU
PU (UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.
kg
Door sealing frames, covers, shutters Door sealing frames
Spare part for option T40, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/25.
B 3WL9 111-0AP01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.360
Protective covers, IP55cannot be used in conjunction with door sealing frames, cover remov-able and can be opened on both sides
B 3WL9 111-0AP02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.600
Shutters
Spare part for option R21, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/26.
3-pole Size I B 3WL9 111-0AP04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.500
Size II B 3WL9 111-0AP06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.630
Size III B 3WL9 111-0AP07-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.860
4-pole Size I B 3WL9 111-0AP08-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.600
Size II B 3WL9 111-0AP11-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.770
Size III B 3WL9 111-0AP12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.070
Arc chutesArc chutes
690 V Size I B 3WL9 111-0AS01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.110
Size II B 3WL9 111-0AS02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.680
Size III B 3WL9 111-0AS03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.980
1000 V/1150 V Size II B 3WL9 111-0AS05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.140
Size III B 3WL9 111-0AS06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 5.620
Arc chute covers1)
Assembly kit for guide frame
Spare part for option R10, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/26.
3-pole Size I B 3WL9 111-0AS32-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.850
Size II B 3WL9 111-0AS36-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.600
Size III B 3WL9 111-0AS38-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 4.050
4-pole Size I B 3WL9 111-0AS42-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.340
Size II B 3WL9 111-0AS44-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.300
Size III B 3WL9 111-0AS46-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 5.210
Withdrawable part codingWithdrawable part coding B 3WL9 111-0AR12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.400By customer, for 36 coding variants
���������
3WL9 111-0AP02-0AA0
3WL9 111-0AP0.-0AA0
��
������
3WL9 111-0AS0.-0AA0
��������
3WL9 111-0AS3.-0AA0
�������
3WL9 111-0AR12-0AA0
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Accessories and spare parts
15/42 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
15
1) For 60 kA ground short-circuit current, order 2.
Designation DT Order No. Price per PU
PU (UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.
kg
Ground-fault protectionGround-fault protection between the guide frame and the withdrawable circuit breakers For 30 kA ground short-circuit current1)
Contacting module for guide frame
Size I, II B 3WL9 111-0BA01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.330
Size III B 3WL9 111-0BA02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.350
Contacting modules for withdrawable circuit breakers
3-pole Size I B 3WL9 111-0BA05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.250
Size II B 3WL9 111-0BA06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.530
Size III B 3WL9 111-0BA07-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.270
4-pole Size I B 3WL9 111-0BA08-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.500
Size II B 3WL9 111-0BA04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.850
Size III B 3WL9 111-0BA10-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.950
Support bracketsSupport bracketsFor mounting fixed-mounted circuit breakers on vertical plane, only for sizes I and II (1 set = 2 units)
B 3WL9 111-0BB50-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 7.000
����������
3WL9 111-0BA02-0AA0
�������
3WL9 111-0BA07-0AA0
��
���
��
3WL9 111-0BB50-0AA0
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2009
15
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Accessories and spare parts
15/43Siemens LV 1 · 2009
1) Each CubicleBUS module is supplied with a 0,2 m factory-fitted cable to connect the modules with each other. A longer factory-fitted cable is required for connection to the circuit breaker.
2) Manual for MODBUS communication solution available on request. 3) A 24 V DC power supply unit is required.
Designation DT Order No. Price per PU
PU (UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.
kg
CubicleBUS modules1)
Digital output modules with rotary coding switch, relay outputs
B 3WL9 111-0AT26-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.240
Digital output modules, configurable, relay outputs B 3WL9 111-0AT20-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.310
Digital input modules B 3WL9 111-0AT27-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.240
Analog output modules B 3WL9 111-0AT23-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.240
Zone Selective Interlocking modules B 3WL9 111-0AT21-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.240
Parameterization systems Breaker Data Adapters (BDA)3)
Parameterization, operation, monitoring and diagnostics of SENTRON circuit breakers using the local interface; Breaker Data Adapter, connection cable to the SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker and to the programming device (e.g. notebook); can be run with Internet Explorer with JAVA2 VM 1.4.0-01 and higher
B 3WL9 111-0AT28-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.900
BDA Plus3) Same as BDA, but with additional Ethernet interface for connection to Ethernet/Intra-net/Internet
B 3WL9 111-0AT33-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.200
Connection cables for BDA Plus
Connection cable for connection of BDA Plus to terminal X8 of the SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker. Required if neither COM15 nor COM16 nor other external CubicleBUS modules are available, length 2 m.
B 3WL9 111-0BC21-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.350
Switch ES Power parameteriza-tion software
Calibration, operation, monitoring, and diag-nostics of SENTRON circuit breakers via PROFIBUS DP; runs under Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows NT, Windows 2000 and Windows XP Professional, requires additional PROFIBUS card e.g. CP5613
A 3ZS2 311-0CC10-0YA0 1 1 unit 133 0.200
Accessories for communicationsPreassembled cables for CubicleBUS modules
0.2 m long, for connection to SENTRON 3WL with COM15/COM16
B 3WL9 111-0BC04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.020
1 m long, for connection to SENTRON 3WL with COM15/COM16
B 3WL9 111-0BC02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.050
2 m long, for connection to SENTRON 3WL with COM15/COM16
B 3WL9 111-0BC03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.060
2 m long, for connection to SENTRON 3WL without COM15/COM16
B 3WL9 111-0BC05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.070
SENTRON manuals for communication solutions2)
Detailed description of the communication functions for SENTRON circuit breakers incl. installation, connection, commissioning, data transmission to PLC as well as description of Switch ES Power and BDA.
English Token fee on request A5E0151353-01
German Token fee on request A5E0151347-01
To be ordered from: http://www.click4business-supplies.de
Free download from: http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/manuals
Voltage transformers, 3-pole, for SENTRON 3WL with measure-ment function Plus
380 ... 690 V/100 V, class 0.5 B 3WL9 111-0BB68-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.600
All communication components, CubicleBUS modules and measurement functions are available for the ETU45B and ETU76B releases.
� � � � � � � � �
3WL9 111-0AT23-0AA0
� � � � � � � � � �
3WL9 111-0AT28-0AA0
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Accessories and spare parts
15/44 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
15
1) If retrofitted, a measuring accuracy of 3 % is achieved.
Designation DT Order No. Price per PU
PU (UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.
kg
Retrofitting and spare parts for communication PROFIBUS retrofit kits
Retrofit kit for PROFIBUS communications including COM15, BSS and set of cables for all SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers with ETU45B and ETU76B releases
B 3WL9 111-0AT12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.260
COM15 PROFIBUS modules
B 3WL9 111-0AT15-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.140
MODBUS retrofit kits
Retrofit kit for MODBUS communications including COM16, BSS and set of cables for all SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers with ETU45B and ETU76B releases
B 3WL9 111-0AT14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.260
COM16 MODBUS modules
B 3WL9 111-0AT17-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.140
Breaker status sensor (BSS)
B 3WL9 111-0AT16-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.120
Measurement function Plus1)
For all ETUs except ETU release 2 (voltage transformer required)
B 3WL9 111-0AT03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.250
Measurement function Plus1)
For ETU release 2 (voltage transformer required)
B 3WL9 111-0AT04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.250
All communication components, CubicleBUS modules and measurement functions are available for the ETU45B and ETU76B releases.
� � � � � � �
�� ��������
������
����������
��� !�!��
3WL9 111-0AT15-0AA0
���
���
��!
������
���
���!�!��
3WL9 111-0AT16-0AA0
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2009
15
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Accessories and spare parts
15/45Siemens LV 1 · 2009
1) In the case of vertical connection size I, up to 1000 A one 3WL9 111–0AM01-0AA0 vertical connection is required, up to 1600 A two 3WL9 111-0AM01-0AA0 vertical connections are required.
2) In the case of vertical connection size II, up to 2500 A one 3WL9 111–0AM02-0AA0 vertical connection is required, up to 3200 A two 3WL9 111-0AM02-0AA0 vertical connections are required.
Designation DT Order No. Price per PU
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.
kgMain conductor connections, fixed mounting (essential accessory)
Specified for each connection
Front-accessible main circuit connections, single hole at top
Size I, up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.100Size I, 1250 to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AL02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.600
Size II, up to 2000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.000Size II, up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111-0AL04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.600Size II, up to 3200 A B 3WL9 111-0AL05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.500
Size III, up to 4000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 6.100
Front-accessible main circuit connections, single hole at bottom
Size I, up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL51-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.000Size I, 1250 to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AL52-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.300
Size II, up to 2000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL53-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.800Size II, up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111-0AL54-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.100Size II, up to 3200 A B 3WL9 111-0AL55-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.000
Size III, up to 4000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL56-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 5.200
Front-accessible main circuit connections, acc. to DIN 43673, double hole at top
Size I, up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL07-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.400Size I, 1250 to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AL08-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.000
Size II, up to 2000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL11-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.400Size II, up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111-0AL12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 4.500Size II, up to 3200 A B 3WL9 111-0AL13-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 4.400
Size III, up to 4000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 7.800
Front-accessible main circuit connections, acc. to DIN43673, double hole at bottom
Size I, up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL57-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.300Size I, 1250 to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AL58-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.700
Size II, up to 2000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL61-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.000Size II, up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111-0AL62-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.700Size II, up to 3200 A B 3WL9 111-0AL63-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.600
Size III, up to 4000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL64-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 6.400
Rear vertical main circuit connections
Size I1), up to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AM01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.500
Size II2), up to 3200 A B 3WL9 111-0AM02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.200
Size III, up to 6300 A B 3WL9 111-0AM03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 5.000
3WL9 111-0AL06-0AA0
3WL9 111-0AL56-0AA0
3WL9 111-0AL14-0AA0
3WL9 111-0AL64-0AA0
3WL9 111-0AM03-0AA0
��� !�!�!
��� !�!��
��� !�!��
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Accessories and spare parts
15/46 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
15
1) When using front-accessible main circuit connections (withdrawable circuit breakers) supports are required.
Designation DT Order No. Price per PU
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.
kgMain conductor connections, withdrawable versions (essential accessory)
Specified for each connection
3WL9 111-0AN06-0AA0
Front-accessible main circuit connections, single hole at top or at bottom1)
Size I, up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.000Size I, 1250 to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AN02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.300
Size II, up to 2000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.800Size II, up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111-0AN04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.100Size II, up to 3200 A B 3WL9 111-0AN05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.000
Size III, up to 4000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 5.200
3WL9 111-0AN14-0AA0
Front-accessible main circuit connections, acc. to DIN 43673, double hole at top or at bottom1)
Size I, up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN07-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.300Size I, 1250 to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AN08-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.700
Size II, up to 2000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN11-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.000Size II, up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111-0AN12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.700Size II, up to 3200 A B 3WL9 111-0AN13-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.600
Size III, up to 4000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 6.400
3WL9 111-0AN41-0AA0
Supports for front and DIN connecting bars
3-pole for 3 bars Size I B 3WL9 111-0AN41-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700
Size II B 3WL9 111-0AN42-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.350
Size III B 3WL9 111-0AN43-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.420
4-pole for 4 bars Size I B 3WL9 111-0AN44-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.200
Size II B 3WL9 111-0AN45-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.200
Size III B 3WL9 111-0AN46-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.200
Rear vertical main circuit connections
Size I, up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN15-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.660Size I, 1250 to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AN16-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.870
Size II, up to 2000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN17-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.150Size II, up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111-0AN18-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.490Size II, up to 3200 A B 3WL9 111-0AN21-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.580
Size III, up to 5000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN22-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 6.380
3WL9 111-0AN23-0AA0
Size III, up to 6300 A (3 busbar connection pieces for 3-pole circuit breakers)
B 3WL9 111-0AN23-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 19.170
Size III, up to 6300 A (4 busbar connection pieces for 4-pole circuit breakers)
B 3WL9 111-0AN20-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 18.410
Size III, up to 6300 A (4 busbar connection pieces for 4-pole circuit breakers)
B 3WL9 111-0AN10-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 18.300
Rear horizontal circuit connections
Size I, up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN32-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.630Size I, 1250 to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AN33-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.770
Size II, up to 2000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN34-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.020Size II, up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111-0AN35-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.240
3WL9 111-0AN24-0AA0
Size II, up to 3200 A B 3WL9 111-0AN36-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.170
Size III, up to 5000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN37-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.860
Connecting flanges Size I, up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN24-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.610Size I, 1250 to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AN25-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.640
Size II, up to 2000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN26-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.980Size II, up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111-0AN27-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.020Size II, up to 3200 A B 3WL9 111-0AN28-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.310
Size III, up to 4000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN31-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.370
��� !�!��
��� !�!��
��� !�!��
��� !�!��
��
� !
�!��
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2009
15
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Accessories and spare parts
15/47Siemens LV 1 · 2009
1) Please specify the circuit breaker ID No. in plain text when ordering.
Designation DT Order No. Price per PU
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.
kg
Conversion setsFor converting fixed-mounted circuit breakers into withdrawable circuit breakersGuide frames and sliding contact modules must be ordered separately.
Number of poles Size
3-pole I B 3WL9 111-0BC11-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 5.100
II B 3WL9 111-0BC12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 5.900
III B 3WL9 111-0BC13-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 8.100
4-pole I B 3WL9 111-0BC14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 6.400
II B 3WL9 111-0BC15-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 6.450
III B 3WL9 111-0BC16-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 10.700
Main contact elementsYou must specify the circuit breaker ID No. when ordering!Specified for each connection (depending on the number of poles on the circuit breaker, order 3 or 4 units)
Sizes In max Order No. is automatically adapted to the circuit breaker ID number
I Up to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AM90 1 1 unit 103 On req.L1Y1)
II Up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111-0AM91 1 1 unit 103 On req.L1Y1)
II Up to 4000 A B 3WL9 111-0AM92 1 1 unit 103 On req.L1Y1)
III Up to 6300 A B 3WL9 111-0AM93 1 1 unit 103 On req.L1Y1)��� !�!��
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Accessories and spare parts
15/48 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
15
Conversion for the following applications is possible
Schematics in as-supplied state Version Size DT Order No. Price per PU
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.
kg
Withdrawable short-circuits, grounding and bridging unitsTop and bottom parts of system are short-circuited and grounded
3-pole
Up to 1600 A
I C 3WL9 111-0BD01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 30.000
Up to 3200 A
II C 3WL9 111-0BD03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 40.500
Up to 6300 A
III C 3WL9 111-0BD05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 65.000
4-pole
Up to 1600 A
I C 3WL9 111-0BD02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 35.000
Up to 3200 A
II C 3WL9 111-0BD04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 46.000
Up to 6300 A
III C 3WL9 111-0BD06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 70.000
NSE0_01113
L1 L2 L3 NS
E0_
0111
8
N L1 L2 L3
NS
E0_
0111
9
(as-supplied state)
Top and bottom parts of system are short-circuited and grounded (as-supplied state)
Top part of system is short-circuited and grounded, infeed from bottom
Withdrawable bridging unit, infeed and outgoing terminals are permanently connected to each other
Bottom part of system is short-circuited and grounded, infeed from top
NSE0_01113
L1 L2 L3 NS
E0_
0111
8
N L1 L2 L3
NS
E0_
0111
9
NSE0_01112
L1 L2 L3
NS
E0_
0111
6
N L1 L2 L3
NS
E0_
0111
7
NSE0_01115
����������
���������
NSE0_01114
L1 L2 L3 NS
E0_
0112
0
L1 L2 L3N NS
E0_
0112
1
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2009
15
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Accessories and spare parts
15/49Siemens LV 1 · 2009
■ Options
Structure of the Order No.
Accessories: with first order (components are already mounted)
Accessories: for retrofitting (components for subsequent fitting)
Documentation
Free download of documentation from http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/manuals
■ More information
Up-to-date information on the Internet at: http://www.siemens.com/sentron
3WL1ÔÔÒ–ÖéâÕÓ–ÓáÜÔ An important prerequisite for computer-based order processing is that order numbers must be structured according to standardized criteria.
They are used as an unambiguous means of communication for various purposes:
• Offer processing Selection and configuration
• Order processingOrdering Order confirmationHandling warehouse products Order processing at the supply bases Delivery and shipment
• Reporting and planning
• Service and warranty
The standardized structure ensures that only one Order No. has to be adminis-tered for one device.
This saves time and effort during planning, configuring, ordering and stock keeping, and consequently above all it saves costs.
The example opposite explains the various positions within an Order No.
Example5th position: Size Size II Ô
6th and 7th positions:
Max. rated circuit breaker current In max
In max = 2000 A ÔÒ
8th position: Switching capacity class
High breaking capacity "H": 100 kA
Ö
9th position: Electronic releases ETU76B with pixel graphics display
é
10th position: Electronic release supplement
... with ground-fault protection â
11th position: Number of poles 3-pole Õ
12th position: Installation type Fixed mounting, main circuit connections on rear, vertical
Ó
13th position: Operating mechanisms
Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing
Ó
14th position: 1st auxiliary release Shunt release AC 50/60 Hz 110 V
á
15th position: 2nd auxiliary release Without 2nd auxiliary release Ü
16th position: Auxiliary switch 2 NO + 2 NC Ô
Example 3WL1ÔÓØ–ÖåâÕÓ–ÓáÜÕ–õ áÒÔ Additional accessory components can be ordered ready-mounted.
These supplements are identified by "-Z".
Even with additional components, one Order No. is sufficient.
"–Z" with order code Communications interface "Standard" + Breaker Status Sensor (BSS) + communication module COM15 for connection to PROFIBUS DP
õ áÒÔ
Example Additional accessories which are not intended to be ready-mounted in the factory, such as spare parts for storage, can also be ordered separately from the circuit breaker.
Accessories for retrofitting are identified by the Order No. stem 3WL9.
3WL9ÓÓÓ–ÒÁÜÔÓ–ÒÜÜÒ
Protective cover for mechanical ON/OFFwithout lock
Operating manual Complete set
German/English Order No. 3ZX18 12-0WL00-0AN1 Delivery time class CFrench/Italian Order No. 3ZX18 12-0WL00-0AJ1 On requestSpanish/Portuguese Order No. 3ZX18 12-0WL00-0AL1 On request
ManualCommunication
German Order No. A5E0151347-01English Order No. A5E0151353-01
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)
3- and 4-pole, fixed-mounted versions
15/50 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
15
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
■ Selection and ordering data
For general data see page 15/6.
Note: For voltages over 600 V use the version for 1000 V DC rated volt-age: Order with "-Z" and order code "A05".
All other accessory parts must be ordered by specifying "–Z" and the corresponding order code, see "3WL Air circuit break-ers/non-automatic air circuit breakers up to 6300 A (AC)", "Options", page 15/24 onwards. 1) Provisions to dissipate heat must be made on the line side.2) For permissible rated short-time current Icw and rated short-circuit switch-
ing capacity Icc for non-automatic air circuit breakers, see Technical Information LV 1T, "General Data", "Technical specifications".
An external overload and short-circuit protection device is avail-able from the company "mat" for the SENTRON 3WL non-auto-matic air circuit breakers. Available only directly from the company "mat" – Maschinen- und Anlagentechnik (for address see "Appendix, External Partners").
Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.
DT 3-pole non-automatic air circuit breakers
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.
Order No. For Order No. supplements, see page 15/23
Price per PUA kg
Horizontal main circuit connectionII 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 64,000
Vertical main circuit connectionII 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 85,000
Front main circuit connection, single holeII 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000
Front main circuit connection, double holeII 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Add. price
Without electronic release AA WithoutStandard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing 1AA2 Without
DC
Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.
DT 4-pole non-automatic air circuit breakers
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.
Order No. For Order No. supplements, see page 15/23
Price per PUA kg
Horizontal main circuit connectionII 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67,000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67,000II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 77,000
Vertical main circuit connectionII 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 75,000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 75,000II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 103,000
Front main circuit connection, single holeII 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67,000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67,000
Front main circuit connection, double holeII 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67,000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67,000Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Add. price
Without electronic release AA WithoutStandard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing 1AA2 Without
Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. and indicate the appropriate order code(s).
Order No. with "–Z" and additional order code
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 163WL1 2 . 0 – 8 . . . . – . . . . –Z@@@
Additional price
3-pole 4-pole
Rated voltage 1000 V DC
Size II Up to 2000 A A 0 5
Size II Up to 4000 A A 0 5
DC
© Siemens AG 2009
15
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)
3-pole, withdrawable versions
15/51Siemens LV 1 · 2009* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Note: For voltages over 600 V use the version for 1000 V DC rated volt-age; order with "-Z" and order code A05.
All other accessory parts must be ordered by specifying "–Z" and the corresponding order code, see "3WL Air circuit break-ers/non-automatic air circuit breakers up to 6300 A (AC)", "Op-tions", page 15/24 onwards.
1) Provisions to dissipate heat must be made on the line side.2) For permissible rated short-time current Icw and rated short-circuit switch-
ing capacity Icc for non-automatic air circuit breakers, see Technical Infor-mation LV 1T, "General Data", "Technical specifications".
3) The permissible temperature-rise limits according to IEC 60947-2 are 5 K lower for a tin surface than for a silver surface.
4) If ordering withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame separately, specify order code "A05" for withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame.
An external overload and short-circuit protection device is avail-able from the company "mat" for the SENTRON 3WL non-auto-matic air circuit breakers. Available only directly from the company "mat" – Maschinen- und Anlagentechnik (for address see "Appendix, External Partners").
Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.
DT 3-pole non-automatic air circuit breakers
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.
Order No. For Order No. supplements, see page 15/23
Price per PU
A kg
Without guide frames (for guide frames, see page 15/53)
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 68.000With guide frames, horizontal main circuit connectionII 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000With guide frames, vertical main circuit connectionII 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 121.000
With guide frames, connecting flangesII 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Add. price
Without electronic release AA WithoutStandard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements for circuit breakers and guide frames, see page 15/23)
Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing 1AA2 Without
Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. and indicate the appropriate order code(s).
Order No. with "–Z" and additional order code
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 163WL1 2 . 0 – 8 . . 3 . – . . . . –Z@@@
Additional price
3-pole
Rated voltage 1000 V DC
Size II4) Up to 2000 A A 0 5
Size II4) Up to 4000 A A 0 5
Tinned version of the customer's connections on the guide frame3)
Only for circuit breakers in withdrawable version with horizontal connection or flange connection. The normal delivery time increases to 15 work days.
Size II A 0 8
DC
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)
4-pole, withdrawable versions
15/52 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
15
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Note: For voltages over 600 V use the version for 1000 V DC rated volt-age; order with "-Z" and order code A05.
All other accessory parts must be ordered by specifying "–Z" and the corresponding order code, see "3WL Air circuit break-ers/non-automatic air circuit breakers up to 6300 A (AC)", "Op-tions", page 15/24 onwards.
1) Provisions to dissipate heat must be made on the line side.2) For permissible rated short-time current Icw and rated short-circuit switch-
ing capacity Icc for non-automatic air circuit breakers, see Technical Infor-mation LV 1T, "General Data", "Technical specifications".
3) The permissible temperature-rise limits according to IEC 60947-2 are 5 K lower for a tin surface than for a silver surface.
4) If ordering withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame separately, spec-ify order code "A05" for withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame.
An external overload and short-circuit protection device is avail-able from the company "mat" for the SENTRON 3WL non-auto-matic air circuit breakers. Available only directly from the company "mat" – Maschinen- und Anlagentechnik (for address see "Appendix, External Partners").
Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.
DT 4-pole non-automatic air circuit breakers
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.
Order No. For Order No. supplements, see page 15/23
Price per PU
A kg
Without guide frames (for guide frames, see page 15/53)
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000
82.000II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103With guide frames, horizontal main circuit connectionII 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000With guide frames, vertical main circuit connectionII 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 146.000
With guide frames, connecting flangesII 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Add. price
Without electronic release AA WithoutStandard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements for circuit breakers and guide frames, see page 15/23)
Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing 1AA2 Without
Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. and indicate the appropriate order code(s).
Order No. with "–Z" and additional order code
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 163WL1 2 . 0 – 8 . . 4 . – . . . . –Z@@@
Additional price
4-pole
Rated voltage 1000 V DC
Size II4) Up to 2000 A A 0 5
Size II4) Up to 4000 A A 0 5
Tinned version of the customer's connections on the guide frame3)
Only for circuit breakers in withdrawable version with horizontal connection or flange connection. The normal delivery time increases to 15 work days.
Size II A 0 8
DC
© Siemens AG 2009
15
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)
Accessories and spare parts
15/53Siemens LV 1 · 2009* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
■ Selection and ordering data
Guide frames for DC non-automatic air circuit breakers
Guide frames for 4-pole DC non-automatic air circuit breakers
All other accessory parts must be ordered by specifying "–Z" and the corresponding order code, see "3WL Air circuit breakers/Non-Automatic Air circuit breakers up to 6300 A (AC)", "Options", page 15/24 onwards.1) The permissible temperature-rise limits according to IEC 60947-2 are 5 K
lower for a tin surface than for a silver surface.
Size Max. rated circuit breaker currentIn max
DT For 3-pole non-automatic air circuit breakers
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.Order No.
(Order No. supplements required according to table below)
Price per PU
A kg
Front main circuit connection, single holeII 2000 B 3WL9 212-3DA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31,000Front main circuit connection, double hole II 2000 B 3WL9 212-3DB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31,000Horizontal main circuit connectionII 2000 B 3WL9 212-3DC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31,000II 4000 B 3WL9 212-6DC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60,000Vertical main circuit connectionII 2000 B 3WL9 212-3DD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31,000II 4000 B 3WL9 212-6DD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60,000Main circuit connection connecting flangesII 2000 B 3WL9 212-3DE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31,000II 4000 B 3WL9 212-6DE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60,000
Order No. supplements Add. priceNumber of auxiliary supply connectors 3-pole
Without1 connector2 connectors3 connectors4 connectorsFor required number of auxiliary supply connectors, see table on page 15/29
01234
Without
Type of auxiliary circuit connectionsWithoutWith screw connections (SIGUT) With screwless connection method (tension spring)
012
Without
Position indicator switchesWithout 0 WithoutOption 1 Connected 1 CO contact,
test 1 CO contact,disconnected 1 CO contact
1
Option 2 Connected 3 CO contacts,test 2 CO contacts,disconnected 1 CO contact
2
ShuttersWithoutWith shutter, 2 parts, lockable
AB
Without
Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. and indicate the appropriate order code(s).
Order No. with "–Z" and additional order code
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 163WL9 2 1 2 – . . . . . – . . A1 –Z@@@
Add. price
Rated voltage 1000 V DC
Size II A 0 5
Tinned version of the customer's connections on the guide frame1)
Only for guide frames with horizontal connection or flange connection
Size II A 0 8
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)
Accessories and Spare Parts
15/54 Siemens LV 1 · 2009
15
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
For guide frames for 3-pole DC non-automatic air circuit breakers see previous page
All other accessory parts must be ordered by specifying "–Z" and the corresponding order code, see "3WL Air circuit breakers/Non-Automatic Air circuit breakers up to 6300 A (AC)", "Options", page 15/24 onwards.1) The permissible temperature-rise limits according to IEC 60947-2 are 5 K
lower for a tin surface than for a silver surface.
Size Max. rated circuit breaker currentIn max
DT For 4-pole non-automatic air circuit breakers
PU(UNIT, SET, M)
PS* PG Weight per PU approx.Order No.
(Order No. supplements required according to table below)
Price per PU
A kg
Front main circuit connection, single holeII 2000 B 3WL9 212-3EA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37,000Front main circuit connection, double hole II 2000 B 3WL9 212-3EB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37,000Horizontal main circuit connectionII 2000 B 3WL9 212-3EC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37,000II 4000 B 3WL9 212-6EC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84,000Vertical main circuit connectionII 2000 B 3WL9 212-3ED@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37,000II 4000 B 3WL9 212-6ED@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84,000Main circuit connection connecting flangesII 2000 B 3WL9 212-3EE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37,000II 4000 B 3WL9 212-6EE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84,000
Order No. supplements Add. priceNumber of auxiliary supply connectors 4-pole
Without1 connector2 connectors3 connectors4 connectorsFor required number of auxiliary supply connectors, see table on page 15/29
01234
Without
Type of auxiliary circuit connectionsWithoutWith screw connections (SIGUT) With screwless connection method (tension spring)
012
Without
Position indicator switchesWithout 0 WithoutOption 1 Connected 1 CO contact,
test 1 CO contact,disconnected 1 CO contact
1
Option 2 Connected 3 CO contacts,test 2 CO contacts,disconnected 1 CO contact
2
ShuttersWithoutWith shutter, 2 parts, lockable
AB
Without
Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. and indicate the appropriate order code(s).
Order No. with "–Z" and additional order code
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 163WL9 2 1 2 – . . . . . – . . A1 –Z@@@
Add. price
Rated voltage 1000 V DC
Size II A 0 5
Tinned version of the customer's connections on the guide frame1)
Only for guide frames with horizontal connection or flange connection
Size II A 0 8
© Siemens AG 2009
Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
15
15
15/2 Introduction
3WL Air Circuit Breakers
3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)General data
15/6 - Design15/12 - Function15/19 - Configuration15/24 - Technical specifications
Project planning aids15/32 - Characteristic curves15/34 - Dimensional drawings15/47 - Schematics15/49 - More information
3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)General data
15/50 - Technical specificationsProject planning aids
15/51 - Characteristic curves15/51 - Dimensional drawings15/55 - Schematics15/56 - More information
SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices – Air Circuit Breakers
© Siemens AG 2009
SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices — Air Circuit Breakers
Introduction
15/2 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
15
■ Overview
✓ Standard-- Not available❑ Optional1) ETU15B cannot be used with 3WL circuit breakers, size III.
3WL air circuit breakers/non-automatic air circuit breakers according to UL 489 up to 5000 A, see Catalog LV 16.
Air circuit breakers3WL air circuit breakers/non-automatic air circuit breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
3WL non-automatic air circuit breakers up to 4000 A (DC)
Size I, II, III II
Rated current In A 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3200, 4000, 5000, 6300
1000, 2000, 4000
Number of poles 3-pole, 4-pole 3-pole, 4-pole
Rated operational voltage Ue
V ACV DC
Up to 690/1000/1150--
--Up to 1000
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity at 500 V AC
kA
Size I
55/66
Size II
66/80/100
Size III
100/150 (3-pole), 130 (4-pole)
30/25/20 (at 300/600/1000 V DC)
Endurance Operat-ing cycles
20000 15000 10000 15000
Mounting position
Degree of protectionWith cover IP55 IP55Without cover (with door sealing frame)
IP41 IP41
Dimensions 3-/4-pole
W mm 320/410 460/590 704/914 460/590
H mm 434 434 434 434
D mm
H mm
D mm
291
465.5
471
291
465.5
471
291
465.5
471
291
465.5
471
Type ETU15B1) ETU25B ETU27B ETU45B ETU76BSolid-state releases for SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers Overload protection ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Short-time delayed short-circuit protection
-- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Instantaneous short-circuit protection
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Neutral conductor protection -- -- ✓ ✓ ✓
Ground-fault protection -- -- ✓ ❑ ❑
Zone Selective Interlocking -- -- -- ❑ ❑
LCD, 4-line -- -- -- ❑ --
LCD, graphic -- -- -- -- ✓
Communication through PROFIBUS DP/MODBUS
-- -- -- ❑ ❑
Measurement function Plus -- -- -- ❑ ❑
Selectable parameter sets -- -- -- -- ✓
Parameters freely programmable -- -- -- -- ✓
CubicleBUS -- -- -- ✓ ✓
Size IIISize IISize I
� � � � � � � � � �
� � � �
� � � � � � � � � �
� � � �
� � � � � � � � � �
� � � �
� � � � � � � � � �
� � � �
NSS0_00535
H
W D
NS
E0_
0110
6a
NS
E0_
0110
7a
NS
E0_
0110
8a
NS
E0_
0110
9a Rating Plug
NS
E0_
0111
1a
Fixed mounting
Withdrawable
© Siemens AG 2009
SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices — Air Circuit Breakers
15/3Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
Introduction
15
Switching capacity
1) Size II with In max � 2500 A.2) Size II with In max = 3200 A and In max = 4000 A.3) At a rated voltage of 690 V the Icw value of the circuit breaker cannot be
greater than the Icu or Ics value at 690 V.4) Rated operational voltage Ue = 1150 V.
Size I II III
Type 3WL11 3WL12 3WL13
Switching capacity class N
S
N
S
H
H
C3-pole
C4-pole
Short-circuit breaking capacityRated operational voltage Ue up to 415 V AC
Icu kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
Ics kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
Icm kA 121 145 145 176 220 220 330 286
Rated operational voltage Ue up to 500 V AC
Icu kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
Ics kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
Icm kA 121 145 145 176 220 220 330 286
Rated operational voltage Ue up to 690 V AC
Icu kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 150 130
Ics kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 150 130
Icm kA 88 105 105 165 187 187 330 286
Rated operational voltage Ue up to 1000 V/1150 V AC
Icu kA -- -- -- -- 45 50 704) 704)
Ics kA -- -- -- -- 45 50 704) 704)
Icm kA -- -- -- -- 95 105 1544) 1544)
Rated short-time withstand current Icw of the circuit breakers3)
0.5 s kA 50 66 66 80 100 100 100 100
1 s kA 42 50 55 66 80 100 100 100
2 s kA 29.5 35 39 46 651)/702) 80 80 80
3 s kA 24 29 32 37 501)/652) 65 65 65Short-circuit breaking capacity Icc of the non-automatic air circuit breakersUp to 500 V AC
kA 50 66 66 80 100 100 100 100
Up to 690 V AC
kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 100 100
N S N S H H C C
Circuit breakers with ECO switching capacity N (Icu = Ics up to 55 kA size I/up to 66 kA size II at 500 V)
Circuit breakers with standard switching capacity S (Icu = Ics up to 66 kA size I/up to 80 kA size II at 500 V)
Circuit breakers with high switching capacity H (Icu = Ics up to 100 kA at 500 V)
Circuit breakers with very high switching capacity C (Icu = Ics up to 150 kA (3-pole)/130 kA (4-pole) at 500 V)
Circuit breakers with DC switching capacity
These circuit breakers are indicated in the Technical specifications by orange backgrounds.
N
S
H
C
DC
© Siemens AG 2009
SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices — Air Circuit Breakers
Introduction
15/4 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
15
SENTRON 3WL:Superior individual products integrated into uniform power distribution systems – up to and including industry-specific industrial and infrastructure solutions
$ Guide frame
% Main circuit connection, front, flange, horizontal, vertical
& Position indicator switch
( Grounding contact, leading
) Shutter
* COM15 PROFIBUS module or COM16 MODBUS module
+ External CubicleBUS modules
, Closing solenoid, auxiliary release
- Auxiliary conductor plug-in system
. Auxiliary switch block
/ Door sealing frame
0 Interlocking set for base plate
1 Transparent panel, function insert
2 EMERGENCY-STOP pushbutton, key operated
3 Motorized operating mechanism
4 Operating cycles counter
5 Breaker Status Sensor (BSS)
6 Protective devices with device holder, solid-state releases (ETU)
7 Remote reset solenoid
8 Breaker Data Adapter (BDA)
9 Four-line display
: Ground-fault protection module
; Rated current module
< Measuring function module
= Circuit breaker
18
17
1620
15
21
23
22
24
14
19
6
45
7
8
9
2
25
10
11
12
13
3
1
NSE
0_01
887a
© Siemens AG 2009
SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices — Air Circuit Breakers
15/5Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
Introduction
15
Communication-capable circuit breakers (with ETU45B or ETU76B solid-state release)
Features• Coordinated communication concept using the PROFIBUS DP
or MODBUS, ranging from 16 A to 6300 A with SENTRON 3VL and SENTRON 3WL
• The high level of modularity of circuit breakers and accessories allows easy retrofitting of all communication components
• Significant additional benefits for the switchboard due to the possibility of linking up external input and output modules to the circuit breaker-internal CubicleBUS of the SENTRON 3WL
• Innovative software products for parameterization, operation, monitoring, and diagnostics of SENTRON circuit breakers, both locally or via PROFIBUS DP, MODBUS or Ethernet/Intranet/Internet
• Complete integration of the SENTRON circuit breakers into the Totally Integrated Power and Totally Integrated Automation solutions
Communication: • For air circuit breakers with optional communication function
(ETU45B or ETU76B solid-state release) see Catalog LV 1.
• For accessories see Catalog LV 1. • For more information see also the Chapter "Power
Management System" and "Software for Power Distribution".
5
1
21
22
19
8 6
2
4
20
14 15 16 17 18 7
91
3
10
11
12
13
SENTRON 3VLElectronic LCD ETU releaseElectronic ETU releaseCOM10 PROFIBUS module complete with ZSICOM20 PROFIBUS module2) complete with ZSIBreaker Data Adapter (BDA)BDA Plus with Ethernet interfaceBrowser-capable input and output device (e.g. notebook)SENTRON 3WLCOM15 PROFIBUS module1)
Breaker Status Sensor (BSS)
1) For a MODBUS connection the COM16 module is required.2) For a MODBUS connection the COM21 module is required.
1234567891011
Electronic ETU releaseMeasurement function PlusZSI moduleDigital output module with relay contactsDigital output module with relay contacts, configurableAnalog output moduleDigital input moduleSwitch ES Power on PCPLC e.g. SIMATIC S7SIMATIC powercontrolPAC
1213141516171819202122
NS
E0_
0110
5h
PROFIBUS
Ethernet
CubicleBUS
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
15/6 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
15
■ Design
Overview of SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers/non-automatic air circuit breakers
Versions
• Rated currents: 630 A to 6300 A• 3 sizes for different rated current ranges (see illustration
"Overview of SENTRON 3WL Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Circuit Breakers")
• 3- and 4-pole versions• Rated operational voltage up to 690 V AC and 1000 V DC.
Special versions up to 1000 V AC and 1150 V AC available• 4 different switching capacity classes in the range from 55 kA
to 150 kA for AC applications and one switching capacity class for DC applications.
The SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers are supplied complete with operating mechanism (manual operating mechanism with me-chanical closing), solid-state release and auxiliary switches (2 NO contacts + 2 NC contacts in the standard version), and can be equipped with auxiliary releases.
Installation types
Fixed-mounted or withdrawable version
Ambient temperaturesThe SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers are climate-proof according to IEC 60068-2-30. They are intended for use in enclosed areas where no severe operating conditions (e. g. dust, corrosive va-pors, damaging gases) are present.When installed in dusty and damp areas, suitable enclosures must be provided.
Coordinated dimensionsThe dimensions of SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers only differ in terms of the width of the device which depends on the number of poles and the size.Due to the nature of the design, the dimensions of devices with a withdrawable version are determined by the dimensions of the guide frames, which are slightly larger.
Non-automatic air circuit breakersA special version of circuit breaker is utilized as a non-automatic air circuit breaker. The non-automatic air circuit breakers are de-signed without an solid-state release system and do not perform any protection duties for the system.One potential application is the use as a bus coupler in systems with parallel feed-ins.The versions and features can be selected according to those of the circuit breakers.
Operating mechanismsThe circuit breakers are available with various optional operating mechanisms:• Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing (stan-
dard design)• Manual operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical
closing• Motorized operating mechanism with mechanical and electri-
cal closing
The operating mechanisms with electrical closing can be used for synchronization tasks.
NSE0_00887 o
HS
1008066
460 / 590 460 / 590
291 / 291 385 / 385
434 / 434 460 / 460
320 / 410 320 / 410
291 / 291 385 / 385
434 / 434 460 / 460
H
100
C
150 (3p)130 (4p)
704 / 914 704 / 914
291 / 291 385 / 385
434 / 434 460 / 460
SN
6655800
1000
1250
1600
630
800
1000
1250
1600
2000
2500
3200
4000
4000
5000
6300
N
30
DC
The dimension for the depth of the circuit breaker is from the circuit breaker rear to the inner surface of the closed switchgear door.
Circuit breaker Breaking capacity DimensionsFixed-mounted,
With-drawable
3- /4-pole 3- /4-pole
Width
Depth
Height
Width
Depth
Height
Width
Depth
Height
Size
III
Size
ISi
ze II
at 500 V AC (kA) orcurated current (A)n max
at 300 V DC (kA)cc
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers
15/7Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
15
Main circuit connections – connection types
Main circuit connections
All circuit breakers are equipped with horizontal main circuit connections on the rear for up to 5000 A as standard (horizontal connection to busbars). Exception: Circuit breakers of size II with max. rated current 4000 A. Circuit breakers with a max. rated current of 6300 A and circuit breakers size II with a max. rated current of 4000 A are equipped with vertical main connections (for upright busbars).
The following options are available, with all combinations of top and bottom connections possible:• Accessible from the front, single hole (for vertically installed
busbars)• Accessible from the front, double hole (holes according to
DIN 43673) (for vertically installed busbars)• At the rear, vertical (for vertically installed busbars)• Connecting flange (for direct connection to guide frame up to
4000 A).
Connection options for auxiliary circuit connections
Auxiliary circuit connections
The type of connection for the auxiliary switches depends on the type of installation:• Withdrawable version: The internal auxiliary switches are con-
nected to the male connector on the switch side. When fully in-serted, the connector makes a connection with the sliding contact module (see "Design", graphic "Guide Frame") in the guide frame. Various adapters can then be used to complete the wiring (see the graphic "Connection Options for Auxiliary Circuit Connections").
• Fixed mounting: In this case the auxiliary supply connectors are engaged directly onto the circuit breaker. The connectors are equipped with coding pins that prevent them being mistak-enly interchanged.
Operator panel
The operator panel is designed to protrude from a cut-out in the door providing access to all control elements and displays with the control cabinet door closed. The operator panels for all circuit breakers (fixed-mounted/with-drawable versions, 3-/4-pole) are identical. The operator panel ensures degree of protection IP41.
Safety and reliability
To protect the circuit breakers and plant against unauthorized switching as well as the maintenance and operator personnel, the system contains many locking devices. Others can be retrofitted.
Other safety features include:• Infeed from above or below, as required• Locking of the guide frame with the circuit breaker removed,
as standard• Locking of the withdrawable circuit breaker against move-
ment, as standard• High degree of protection with cover IP55• Mechanical reclosing lockout after overload or short-circuit
release as standard• The circuit breaker is always equipped with the required num-
ber of auxiliary supply connectors
Standard version
SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers are equipped with the following features as standard:• Mechanical ON and OFF pushbutton• Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing• Switch position indicator• Ready-to-close indicator• Memory status indicator• Auxiliary switch 2 NO + 2 NC• Rear horizontal main circuit connections for fixed-mounted and
withdrawable versions up to 5000 A, and rear vertical main cir-cuit connections for 6300 A applications and size II with 4000 A
• For 4-pole circuit breakers, the fourth pole (N) is installed on the left and is 100 % loadable with the rated current
• Contact erosion indicator for the main contacts• Auxiliary circuit plug-in system with SIGUT screw terminals
Delivery inclusive of all auxiliary circuit connectors to internal features including coding device for the prevention of incor-rect installation of auxiliary supply connectors for fixed-mounted circuit breakers
• Mechanical "tripped" indicator for solid-state release system• Mechanical reclosing lockout after tripping operation• Operator panel cannot be taken off with the circuit breaker in
the ON positionAdditional features of the withdrawable version:• Main contacts:
Laminated receptacles in the guide frame, penetration blades on the withdrawable circuit breaker
• Position indicator in the operator panel of the withdrawable circuit breaker
• Captive manual crank handle for moving the withdrawable circuit breaker
• Guide frame with guide rails for easy moving of the withdraw-able circuit breaker
• The withdrawable circuit breaker can be locked to prevent it being pushed out of position
• The withdrawable circuit breaker cannot be moved when it is in the ON position
• Coding of the rated current between the guide frame and the withdrawable circuit breaker
Standards
SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers comply with:• IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-2• EN 60947-1, EN 60947-2• Climate-proof according to IEC 60068-2-30Versions according to UL 489 also available, see Catalog LV 16.For further specifications, see Appendix.
Horizontal connection
Front connection with single hole or double hole
Vertical connection
Horizontal connection
Front connection with single hole or double hole
Vertical connection
Flange connection
������� ���
������� ���
������� � �
������� �
������� ���
������� ���
������� ���
������� ���
������� ��
Fixed-mounted circuit breakers
Withdrawable circuit breakers and guide frames
Connection using screw terminals system (SIGUT) (standard)
Screwless connection method (tension springs) (optional)
������� ���
������� ���
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
15/8 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
15
Withdrawable short-circuit, grounding, and bridging units
Portable positively-driven grounding and short-circuit devices are used for the disconnected system sections to verify isolation from the supply at the workplace.
Withdrawable grounding units allow simple and comfortable grounding. They are simply inserted into the guide frames in place of the corresponding withdrawable circuit breakers. This ensures that these devices are always first connected with the grounding electrode and then with the components to be grounded.
The grounding terminals are fitted to the side of the switch enclo-sure and establish the connection when inserted into the guide frame.
All withdrawable terminals are short-circuited and grounded on delivery.
Qualified electricians can easily convert it to a withdrawable bridging unit by following the enclosed instructions.
In addition, the withdrawable unit can be adapted to various rated currents of a size.
Withdrawable short-circuit and grounding unit
The withdrawable short-circuit and grounding unit consists of a breaker enclosure with penetration blades which are connected with the short-circuiting link.
Depending on the version, the short-circuiting links are arranged at the top or bottom. The grounding and short-circuit connec-tions are established when the device is inserted.
It must be ensured that the side to be short-circuited and grounded is not live. For this reason it is recommended that the withdrawable unit is only wound in when the door is closed.
Withdrawable bridging unit
The withdrawable bridging unit consists of a breaker enclosure in which all disconnection components and the operating mech-anism have been replaced with simple connections between the upper and lower contacts.
Auxiliary releases
Up to two auxiliary releases can be installed at the same time. The following are available:
1 shunt release or 1 undervoltage release or 2 shunt releases or 1 shunt release + 1 undervoltage release
Signal switch for auxiliary releases
One signaling contact is used for each auxiliary release to deter-mine the positions of the auxiliary releases.
Shunt releases
When the operational voltage is connected to the shunt release, the circuit breaker is opened immediately. The shunt release is available in the versions 5 % ON period for overexcitation and 100 % ON period for permanent excitation. This means that it is also possible to block the circuit breaker against being jogged into closing.
An energy storage device for shunt releases allows the circuit breaker to be opened even if the control voltage is no longer available.
Undervoltage releases
The undervoltage release causes the circuit breaker to be opened if the operational voltage falls below a certain value or is not applied. The circuit breaker cannot be closed manually or by means of an electrical ON command if the undervoltage release is not connected to the operational voltage. The undervoltage re-lease has no delay as standard. A delay can be set by the cus-tomer in the range between td < 80 ms and td < 200 ms.
In addition, an undervoltage release with a delay in the range from 0.2 to 3.2 s is available.
Closing solenoid
The closing solenoid is used to close the circuit breaker electri-cally by means of a local electrical ON command or by a remote unit.
Motorized operating mechanisms
The operating mechanism is used to load the storage spring au-tomatically.
The operating mechanism is activated if the storage spring has been unloaded and the control voltage is available.
It is switched off automatically after loading. This does not affect manual operation of the storage spring.
Indicators, signals, and control elements
Motor shutdown switch
Control switch for switching off the motorized operating mecha-nism (automatic loading).
Operating cycles counter
The motorized operating mechanism can be supplied with a 5-digit operating cycles counter. The display is incremented by "1" as soon as the storage spring is fully loaded.
Resetting the manual tripped signal
When the circuit breaker has tripped, this is indicated by the pro-truding red mechanical tripped indicator on the ETU. When the mechanical tripped indicator is activated, the tripping solenoid and tripped signal are reset. If this display is to be reset remotely, the reset button can be equipped with a reset solenoid.
This option allows the circuit breaker to be reset both manually and electrically.
Automatic resetting of reclosing lockout
When the ETU is activated, reclosing of the circuit breaker is pre-vented until the release is either electrically or manually reset. If the "Automatic resetting of reclosing lockout" option is used, the pre-tensioned circuit breaker is ready to close immediately after tripping. Resetting the manual tripped indicator is not included in this option.
Tripped signal switch
If the circuit breaker has tripped due to an overload, short-cir-cuit, ground fault or extended protection function, the tripped signal switch can indicate this. This signal switch is available as an option. If the circuit breaker is used for communication, this option is supplied as standard.
Ready-to-close indicator switch
The SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers are equipped with an opti-cal ready-to-close indicator as standard. In addition, the ready-to-close status can be transmitted by means of a signal switch as an option. If the switch is used for communication, the signal switch is supplied as standard.
Short-time current of the grounding terminal
kA 15 (500 ms)
Rated operational voltage V 1000 (690 for size I)
Standards EN 61230
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers
15/9Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
15
Circuit breakers
Guide frames
� � � � � � � � � �
� � �
� � �
� �
� � �
� � �
� � �
� � �
� � �
� �
� � � �
� � � �
� � � �
� � �
� � � �
� � � �
� � �
� � � �
� � � �
� � � �
� � � �
� � � �
� � � �
� � � �
� � � �
� � � �
� � � �
� � �
� � � �
(1) Arc chute
(2) Carrying handle
(3) Labeling plate
(4) Motor shutdown switch (option) or "Electrical ON" (option)
(5) Name plate for circuit breaker
(6) Memory status indicator
(7) "Mechanical ON" button
(8) Rated current indication
(9) Positioning pictogram
(10) Operating cycles counter (option)
(11) Hand-operated lever
(12) Crank handle
(13) Withdrawable unit drive shaft
(14) Equipment plate
(15) Ground terminal
(16) Position indicator
(17) Table for ground-fault protection
(18) Safety lock for crank handle (option)
(19) Mechanical unlocking of crank handle (option)
(20) Solid-state release
(21) Rated current module
(22) "Mechanical OFF" button or "EMERGENCY-STOP" mushroom pushbutton (option)
(23) Ready-to-close indicator
(24) Switch position indicator
(25) "Tripped" indicator (reset button)
(26) "Secure OFF" locking device (option)
(27) Operator panel
(28) Male connector for auxiliary circuit connections
� � � � � � � � � �
� � �
� � � �
� � � �
� � � �
� � � �
� � � �
� � � �
� � � �
� � � �
� � �
� � �
� �
� � �
� � �
� � �
� � �
� � �
� �
(1) Arc chute cover (option)
(2) Blow-out openings
(3) Opening for crane hook
(4) Shutter (option)
(5) Locking device (shutter) (option)
(6) Type plate for guide frame
(7) Isolating contacts
(8) Ground terminal Ø 14 mm
(9) Locking device for racking rail
(10) Locking device against movement when control cabinet door is open (option)
(11) Door interlocking for guide frame (option)
(12) Racking rail
(13) Factory-set rated current coding
(14) Sliding contact for breaker grounding (option)
(15) Equipment-dependent coding (option)
(16) Shutter actuator (optional)
(17) Position indicator switch (optional)
(18) Sliding contact module for auxiliary conductors (number depends on equipment)
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
15/10 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
15
Locking devices
Locking device in OFF position
This function prevents closing of the circuit breaker and com-plies to the specifications for main switches to EN 60204 (VDE 0113) - disconnector unit. This lockout only affects this cir-cuit breaker.
If the circuit breaker is replaced, closing is no longer prevented unless the new circuit breaker is also protected against unautho-rized closing.
To activate the locking device, the circuit breaker must be opened. The locking device is disabled when the circuit breaker is closed. The lock is only activated when the key is removed. The safety key can be removed only in the "OFF" position.
Locking device for "Electrical ON" (see graphic "Circuit breakers")
This prevents unauthorized electrical closing from the operator panel. Mechanical closing and remote closing remain possible. The lock is only activated when the key is removed.
Locking device for "Mechanical ON" (see graphic "Circuit breakers")
This prevents unauthorized mechanical closing. The mechanical ON button can only be activated if the key is inserted (key oper-ation). Closing with the "Electrical ON" button and remote closing remain possible. The lock is only activated when the key is removed.
"Secure OFF" circuit breaker-independent locking device against unauthorized closing
This special switch-independent function for withdrawable cir-cuit breakers prevents closing and fulfills the specifications for main switches to EN 60204 (VDE 0113) – disconnector unit. Un-authorized closing remains impossible even after the circuit breaker has been exchanged.
To activate the lock, the circuit breaker must be opened. The locking device is disabled when the circuit breaker is closed. The lock is only activated when the key is removed. The safety key can be removed only in the "OFF" position.
Locking device for crank handle
Prevents removal of the crank. The circuit breaker is protected against movement. The lock is only activated when the key is removed.
Locking device for "Mechanical OFF"
Prevents unauthorized mechanical opening from the operator panel. The "Mechanical OFF pushbutton" can only be activated if the key is inserted (key operation). Remote opening remains possible. The lock is only activated when the key is removed.
Locking device for hand-operated lever
The hand-operated lever can be locked with a padlock. The stor-age spring cannot be loaded manually.
Locking device against resetting the "tripped" indicator
A lockable cover prevents manual resetting of the "tripped" indi-cator after overcurrent tripping. This locking device is supplied together with the transparent cover for solid-state releases.
Sealing devices
Sealing cap for "Electrical ON" button
The "Electrical ON button" is equipped with a sealing cap as standard.
Sealing cap for "Mechanical ON" and "OFF" button
The locking set contains covering caps which can be sealed.
Sealing device for solid-state releases
The transparent cover can be sealed. The parameter setting sections are covered to prevent unauthorized access. Openings allow access to the query and test button.
Locking mechanisms
Locking mechanism against movement for withdrawable circuit breakers when the control cabinet door is open
The crank handle is blocked when the control cabinet door is open and cannot be removed. The withdrawable circuit breaker cannot be moved. The lock only affects the inserted crank handle.
Locking of the control cabinet door
The control cabinet door cannot be opened if• The fixed-mounted circuit breaker is closed (the blocking
signal is transmitted via the Bowden wire) or• The withdrawable circuit breaker is in the connected position.
Blocking mechanism using "Mechanical ON" and "OFF" buttons
The "Mechanical ON" and "OFF" buttons are covered with a cap which only allows actuation with a tool. These covering caps are part of the locking set.
Optional equipment for guide frames
Shutters
The sealing strips of the shutter seal the laminated contacts of the guide frame when the withdrawable circuit breaker is re-moved and therefore implement touch protection.
The sealing strips can be manually opened using the strip levers.
The position of the sealing strips can be locked in various posi-tions using padlocks for securing against tampering.
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers
15/11Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
15
Rated current coding unit between circuit breaker and guide frame
Withdrawable circuit breakers and guide frames are equipped with a rated current coding unit as standard.
This ensures that only circuit breakers whose penetration blades are suited to the laminated contacts of the guide frame can be inserted into a guide frame (see diagram below).
Rated current coding unit between circuit breaker and guide frame
Equipment-dependent coding
Withdrawable circuit breakers and guide frames can be retrofit-ted with an equipment-dependent coding unit.
This allows different designs of circuit breakers and guide frames to be uniquely assigned. If the circuit breaker and guide frame have been assigned different codes, the circuit breaker cannot be inserted.
36 different coding options can be selected.
Position indicator switch for guide frames
The guide frame can be equipped with position indicator switches. These can be used to determine the position of the cir-cuit breaker in the guide frame.
Two versions are available:• Option 1
Connected position 1 CO contact, test position 1 CO contact, disconnected position 1 CO contact.
• Option 2 Connected position 3 CO contacts, test position 2 CO contacts, disconnected position 1 CO contact.
Positions of the withdrawable circuit breaker in the guide frame
Phase barriers
The plant engineering company can manufacture phase barriers made of insulating material for the arcing fault barriers. The rear panel of the fixed-mounted circuit breakers or guide frames are equipped with guide grooves.
Arc chute cover
The arc chute cover is available as optional equipment for the guide frame. It protects switchgear components which are lo-cated directly above the circuit breaker.
Door sealing frame and cover
SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers have degree of protection IP20 as standard. However, if the switchgear is to be equipped with a higher degree of protection, a door sealing frame with IP41 and a cover with IP55 are available.
� � �
� �
� � �
���������
� � �
� � �
���������
(1) Guide frame, interior of l/h side; interior of r/h side similar
(2) Coding pin on racking rail in guide frame
(3) Racking rail
(4) Withdrawable circuit breaker, r/h side; l/h side similar
(5) Coding pin on guide frame
Display Position indicator Main circuit Auxiliary circuit Control cabinet door
Shutters
Maintenance position Disconnected Disconnected Open Closed
Disconnected position Disconnected Disconnected Closed Closed
Test position Disconnected Connected Closed Closed
Connected position Connected Connected Closed Open
(1) Auxiliary circuit (2) Main circuit (3) Control cabinet door (4) Shutter
� � � � � � � �
� � �
� � �
� � �
�������
����
�����
�����
� � � � � � � � �
� � �
�������
����
�����
�����
� � � � � � � � �
�������
����
�����
�����
� � � � � � � � �
�������
����
�����
�����
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
15/12 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
15
■ Function
ETU15B ETU25B ETU27B
Functions of the solid-state releasesBasic protection functions
Overload protection L ✔ ✔ ✔
Short-time delayed short-circuit protection S -- ✔ ✔
Instantaneous short-circuit protection I ✔ ✔ ✔
Neutral conductor protection N -- -- ✔
Ground-fault protection G -- -- ✔
Additional functionsN-conductor protection can be switched on/off -- -- ✔
N-conductor protection adjustable -- -- --
Instantaneous short-circuit protection can be switched on/off -- -- --
Non-delayed short-circuit protection can be switched on/off -- -- --
Thermal image can be switched on/off -- -- --
Load monitoring -- -- --
Short-time delayed short-circuit protection switchable to I2t -- -- --
Instantaneous short-circuit protection adjustable ✔ -- --
Overload protection switchable to I4t -- -- --
Overload protection can be switched on/off -- -- --
Selectable parameter sets -- -- --
Parameterization and displayParameterization through rotary coding switches (10 steps) ✔ ✔ ✔
Parameterization through communication (absolute values) -- -- --
Parameterization through user interface of ETU (absolute values) -- -- --
Parameterization of the extended protection functions -- -- --
LCD alphanumerical -- -- --
Graphic LCD -- -- --
Measurement functionMeasurement function Plus -- -- --
CommunicationCubicleBUS -- -- --
Communication through PROFIBUS DP -- -- --
Communication through MODBUS -- -- --
Communication through Ethernet -- -- --
✔ Standard -- Not available ❑ Optional
Detailed information about the functions of the solid-state releases is given in the following.
�
�
� � � � � � � � �
NS
E0_
0088
0b
�
�
��
� � � � � � � � �
NS
E0_
0088
1b
�
�
��
�
��
� � � � � � � � �
NS
E0_
0088
2b
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers
15/13Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
15
ETU45B ETU76B
✔ ✔
✔ ✔
✔ ✔
✔ ✔
❑ ❑
✔ ✔
✔ ✔
✔ ✔
✔ ✔
✔ ✔
✔ ✔
✔ ✔
✔ ✔
✔ ✔
-- ✔
-- ✔
✔ --
-- ✔
-- ✔
❑ ❑
❑ --
-- ✔
❑ ❑
✔ ✔
❑ ❑
❑ ❑
❑ ❑
��
��
���
� ��
����
��
���� ��
NS
E0_
0088
3b
=
12
Rating Plug
��
��
���
� ��
����
��
���� ��
NS
E0_
0088
6c
ETU76B
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
15/14 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
15
Solid-state releases (ETU)
The solid-state release is controlled by a microprocessor and operates independently of an auxiliary voltage. It enables sys-tems to be adapted to the different protection requirements of distribution systems, motors, transformers and generators.
Communication capabilities
The international standard PROFIBUS DP or MODBUS can be used to transmit data such as current values, switching states, reasons for tripping etc. to central computers.
Data acquisition and energy management are possible in con-junction with the Plus measurement function.
A new internal circuit breaker data bus allows switchboard panel communication between the circuit breaker and secondary de-vices in the circuit breaker section:• Actuation of analog displays• Facility to test the communication build-up with circuit
breakers• Display of tripping state and tripping reasons• Input module for reading in further switchgear panel signals
and for transmission of these signals to the PROFIBUS DP or MODBUS
• Various output modules for displaying measured values
This means that it is not only possible to monitor the device re-motely, but also to transmit current values from the entire system and perform switching operations remotely.
I2t and I4t characteristic curve for overload protection
The best protection for the whole switchgear is achieved by set-ting the tripping characteristic curve to an optimum value. In or-der to achieve optimal discrimination for upstream fuses or me-dium voltage protection systems, the inclination of the characteristic curve can be selected for the overload range.
The overload protection L (long time protection) for the solid-state releases ETU45B and ETU76B allows the characteristic curve to be switched between I2t and I4t.
The I4t characteristic improves discrimination for downstream circuit breakers and fuses.
Solid-state releases ETU
Modularity has also been strictly emphasized during the devel-opment of the solid-state releases. These are some of the modules which can be easily retrofitted at any time:• Ground-fault protection module • Communication • Measurement function • Display • Rated current module (Rating Plug)
This allows quick adaptation to new local mains specifications. In addition, innovative functions have been included in the ETUs.
Rated current module/Rating Plug
The rated current module is an exchangeable module which al-lows the user to reduce the rated device current so as to adapt it optimally to the plant; e. g. if a new plant section is taken into operation. The rated current module must be selected to fit the rated current of the plant.
Example of configuration for ETU45B
Measurement function Plus
Selectable parameters
In the case of quick changes of power supply conditions, e. g. for switchovers from transformer to generator operation or if a section of the supply is disconnected when the shift changes, SENTRON 3WL allows the relevant protection param-eters to be quickly adapted to the new conditions. The ETUs contain two independent tripping characteristic curves (parameter sets). The switchover is completed within 200 ms and is performed with the help of an external signal.
Ground-fault protection module (retro-fittable)
Tripped indicator/Reset button
LCD alpha-numericwith 15° inclination and rotatable through 180°
Slide switch for switchable overload characteristic curve
Rated current module/rating plug
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers
15/15Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
15
ETU15B solid-state release
ETU25B solid-state release
Application:
Simple building and system protection without time-se-lective coordination up to 4000 A. Not to be used for size III.
Features:• Adjustable overload protection
with I2t characteristic curve with preset delay time tR = 10 seconds at 6 × IR
• Instantaneous short-circuit pro-tection adjustable in the range 2 ... 8 × In
• Overload display• Protection function is set by
means of the rotary coding switch
For technical details see the table "Functional overview of the solid-state release system" under "Technical specifications".
NS
E0_
0095
4b
Option: safety lockprevents pressing ofreset button afterovercurrent release
Indicator: fault inovercurrent release
Sealing ring
Test socket
Mechanical RESETfor reclosing lockout
and mechanicaltripped indicator
Rotary switch for settingvalue, overload release
Rotary switch for settingvalue, instantaneousshort-circuit release
Indicator: overload alarm
Indicator: overcurrentrelease activated
Application:
Classical building, motor and sys-tem protection with time-selective coordination for up to 6300 A
Features:• Adjustable overload protection
with I2t characteristic curve Delay time tR = 10 seconds at 6 × IR
• Short-time delayed short-circuit protection adjustable in the range 1.25 ... 12 × In and
• Instantaneous short-circuit protection preset to 20 × In, max. 50 kA
• Can be adapted at any time to the required plant currents through retrofittable rated cur-rent module, thus ensuring over-load protection in the range from 100 A to 6300 A
• Overload display• Indicates the reason for tripping
by means of an LED• Test facility for the release• Protection functions are
set by means of the rotary coding switch
For technical details see the table "Functional overview of the solid-state release system" under "Technical specifications".
NS
E0_
0095
5b
Rating Plug
ETU25B
Option: safety lockprevents pressing ofreset button afterovercurrent release
Indicator: fault inovercurrent release
Sealing ring
Test socket
Mechanical RESETfor reclosing lockout
and mechanicaltripped indicator
Rotary switch for settingvalue, overload release
Rotary switch for settingvalue, instantaneousshort-circuit release
Indicator: overcurrentrelease activated
Indicator: overload alarm
Query pushbuttonTest pushbutton Clear pushbutton
Indicator: cause of release
Rotary switch for delay,short-circuit release
Rated current module
Short-circuit protectionfixed setting
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
15/16 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
15
ETU27B solid-state release
ETU45B solid-state release
Application:
Classical building, motor and sys-tem protection with time-selective coordination for up to 6300 A
Features:
The same as ETU25B but also• Reversible neutral conductor
protection• Permanently integrated ground-
fault protection. Calculation of the ground-fault current through vectorial summation current formation
For technical details see the table "Functional overview of the solid-state release system" under "Technical specifications".
NS
E0_
0095
6cRating Plug
N
OFF
OFF ON
ETU27B
Rotary switch for delay,earth-fault protection
N-conductor protectionon/off
value, earth-fault protectionRotary switch for setting
Rated current module
Option: safety lockprevents pressing ofreset button afterovercurrent release
Indicator: fault inovercurrent release
Sealing ring
Test socket
Clear pushbutton
Indicator: cause of release
Rotary switch for delay,short-circuit release
Mechanical RESETfor reclosing lockout
and mechanicaltripped indicator
Rotary switch for settingvalue, overload release
Rotary switch for settingvalue, instantaneousshort-circuit release
Indicator: overcurrentrelease activated
Indicator: overload alarm
Query pushbuttonTest pushbutton
Short-circuit protectionfixed setting
Application:
Low-cost all-round system for intelligent buildings and all types of industrial applica-tions – "CubicleBUS integrated"
Features:
The same as ETU25B but also• Adjustable time-lag class
for overload protection• Selectable characteristic for overload and
short-delayed short-circuit range (current discrimination) for more accurate discrimi-nation adaptation to upstream fuses and protective devices
• Thermal image as restart protection for tripped motor outgoing feeders
• Reversible and adjustable neutral conduc-tor protection
• Modular ground-fault protection module with alarm and tripping functions which can be adjusted separately
• Communication interface, measurement function Plus, optional con-nection of external modules or for retrofitting
• Storage of events and causes for tripping for detailed fault analysis
• Extended protection function possible with measurement function
• Optional high-contrast display with viewing angle adjustment option
• The protection functions can be set by means of a rotary coding switch or slide switch
For technical details see the table "Functional overview of the solid-state release system" "Technical specifications".
=
12
g
NSE0_00957b
Rating Plug
OFF ON
11111
SI
ETU45B
t / t42
t / t2g g
Option: safety lockprevents pressing ofreset button afterovercurrent release
Mechanical RESETfor reclosing lockout
and mechanicaltripped indicator
Indicator: fault inovercurrent release
Sealing ring
Test socket
Rotary switch for settingvalue, overload release
Rotary switch for settingvalue, instantaneousshort-circuit release
Overload alarm
Overcurrent releaseactivated
Clear pushbutton
Indicator: cause of release
Rotary switch for delay,short-circuit release
Rated current module
Selector forearth-fault protection
Rotary switch for delay,earth-fault protection
N-conductor protection on/off
Scroll up
COMMUNICATIONEXPANDED
Indicators:
Rotary switch for settingvalue, short-circuit
protection
Rotary switch for settingvalue, earth-fault
protectionRotary switch for settingvalue, earth-fault alarm
Test pushbuttonQuery pushbutton
Option: alphanumeric display
Scroll down
Thermal memory on/off
Setting valueN-conductor overload
Indicator: earth-fault tripped
Indicator: earth-fault alarmOption: earth-fault module
Rotary switch for delay,overload release
Transfer of overloadcharacteristic
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers
15/17Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
15
ETU76B solid-state release
Ground-fault protection Ground-fault releases "G" sense fault currents that flow to ground and that can cause fire in the plant. Multiple circuit breakers con-nected in series can have their delay times adjusted so as to pro-vide graduated discrimination.
When setting the parameters for the solid-state release it is pos-sible to choose between "alarm" and "trip" in the event that the set current value is exceeded. The reason for tripping is indi-cated by means of an LED when the query button is activated.
The ETU45B and ETU76B solid-state release versions can be retrofitted with a ground-fault protection module. This ground fault protection function is integrated in ETU27B solid-state re-leases.
Application:
The multi-talent with graphical display for system analysis –"CubicleBUS integrated"
Features:
The same as ETU45B but also including• Two protection parameter sets
which can be stored separately in the release (switchover is per-formed by means of external sig-nal)
• With overload protection which can be deactivated for operation in modern drive technology
• Adjustable delay of delayed short-circuit protection up to 4000 ms
• Neutral conductor protection ad-justable up to IN = 200 % In
• Setting of protection functions by means of Breaker Data Adapter (BDA) or via communications in-terface
• Graphical display of all parameters and events/ curve trends
• Graphics display with high con-trast, backlit display, and sleep mode
For technical details see the table "Functional overview of the solid-state release system" under "Technical specifications".
Rating Plug
NSE0_00960b
ETU76B
Option: safety lockprevents pressing ofreset button afterovercurrent release
Mechanical RESETfor reclosing lockout
and mechanicaltripped indicator
Overload alarm
Overcurrent releaseactivated
COMMUNICATIONEXPANDED
Indicators:
Query pushbutton
Test pushbutton
Fields for notingsetting values
Indicator: fault inovercurrent release
Test socket
Clear pushbutton
Ground-fault tripped
Indicators:
Fields for notingsetting values
Ground-fault alarm
Control keys for settinghe release parameters
Indicator: cause of release
Rated current module
Graphical display
Option: earth-fault module
GFM AT 45B ground-fault module
GFM AT 55B-76B ground-fault module
�
ALARM ALARM
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
� g (s) �
2� g
NSE0_00962a
GFM AT 45B
TRIP
G ABCDEOFF
TRIPg
Selector forground-fault
detection
Rotary switchfor setting valueground-fault alarm
Ground-faultalarm
Rotary switchfor setting
value, ground-fault protection delay
� g/� � g
Rotary switchfor setting
value,ground-fault
protection
Ground-faulttripped
Indicators:
2
ALARM ALARM
NSE0_00964a
GFM AT 55B-76B
TRIPTRIP
g
A
A
ms
�
2�
�
g�
g� g�
=
= =
Field fornoting
transferground-fault
detection
Fields fornoting setting
values
Ground-faultalarm
Fields fornoting settingvalues
Ground-faulttripped
Indicators:
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
15/18 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
15
Measurement method
Vectorial summation current formation (measurement method 1)
The three phase currents and the N conductor current are mea-sured directly.
The solid-state release determines the ground-fault current by means of vectorial summation current formation for the three phase currents and the N conductor current.
Direct measurement of the ground-fault current (measurement method 2)
A standard current transformer with the following data is used for measurement of the ground-fault current: 1200 A/1 A, Class 1 (the internal load of SENTRON 3WL is 0.11 �). The current trans-former can be installed directly in the grounded neutral point of a transformer.
3-pole circuit breakers, current transformers in the N conductor
3-pole circuit breakers, current transformers in the grounded neutral point of the transformer
4-pole circuit breakers, current transformers in the grounded neutral point of the transformer
Setting
How the module is set depends on the measurement method used (see above):
Measurement method 1: in position .
Measurement method 2: in position .
This setting can be implemented for the solid-state release ver-sion ETU76B with Menu/Comm.
Ground-fault protection with I2t characteristic curve
With the exception of the ETU27B solid-state release, all versions of the ground-fault modules are supplied with an I2t characteristic curve which can be activated.
Selection criteria for SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers
Basic criteria for selecting circuit breakers are:• Max. short-circuit current at place of installation of circuit
breaker I �k max. This value determines the short-circuit breaking capacity or short-circuit current carrying capacity of the circuit breaker.
• It is compared with the value Icu, Ics, Icw of the circuit breaker and essentially determines the size of the circuit breaker. See illustration "Overview of SENTRON 3WL Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers".
• Rated current In which is to flow through the branch circuit. This value must not be larger than the maximum rated current for the circuit breaker.The rated current for the SENTRON 3WL is set with the rated current module. See "Design", illustration "Overview of SENTRON 3WL Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers".
• Ambient temperature for the circuit breaker. This is usually the control cabinet internal temperature.
• Design of the circuit breaker• Minimum short-circuit current
which flows through the switching device. The release must still detect this value as a short-circuit and must respond by tripping.
Protection functions of the circuit breaker. These are determined by the selection of the corresponding solid-state release, see the table "Functions of the solid-state releases" under "Functions".
������
��
��
��
�
��
���������
������
��
��
��
�
�
��
���������
T6: 1200 A/1 A
������
��
��
��
�
���
���������
T6: 1200 A/1 A
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers
15/19Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
15
SENTRON 3WL for DC applications
This version of the 3WL non-automatic air circuit breaker is suit-able for direct current applications. The external protective de-vice DIGmat S100 provides adjustable overload and short-circuit protection for the SENTRON 3WL non-automatic air circuit breaker.
This is based on the measuring chain of a shunt resistor and the DIGmat S100 tripping unit. Shunt resistors are available for 1000 A, 2000 A and 4000 A (special ranges on request). They are in accordance with DIN 43703 and have a class accuracy of 0.5.
A measuring-circuit voltage of 60 mV DC is picked off for rated current In.
The measuring-circuit voltage is a linear image of the primary current.
The DIGmat S100 tripping unit monitors the image of the primary current thus supplied and compares it with the tripping charac-teristic curve set on the device. The parameter settings on the DIGmat S100 apply also for DC feedbacks. Reversing duty is possible therefore.
The tripping characteristic curve is determined and described by the following variables:• Overload protection:
Setting range IR = 0.4 ... 1.0 InThe curve has a I2t characteristic.The tripping time tR is selectable between 2 and 10 s, with tR defined for 6 × IR.
DIGmat S100
• Short-circuit protection:Setting range Ii = 1.25 × IR up to max. 4 × In If the set value is exceeded, tripping occurs in less than 50 ms.
In = Rated current of the circuit breakerIR = Set current value of the adjustable overload releasetR = Assigned tripping time of the overload tripIi = Instantaneous tripping current of the adjustable short-
circuit releases
The components are available only from the company mat – Maschinen- und Anlagentechnik (for address see "Appendix" => "External Partners").
■ Configuration
Mutual mechanical circuit breaker interlocking
The module for mutual mechanical interlocking can be used for one or two SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers and can be adapted easily to the corresponding versions. The fixed-mounted and withdrawable circuit breaker versions are fully compatible and can therefore be used in a mixed configuration in an installation. This also applies to 3WN6 circuit breakers.
The circuit breakers can be mounted alongside each other or one above the other, whereby the distance of the circuit breakers is determined solely by the length of the Bowden wire (lengths: 2 m/3 m/4.5 m). Interlock signals are looped through using the Bowden wires. Interlocking is only effective in the connected po-sition in the case of withdrawable circuit breakers. The mechan-ical endurance of the Bowden cables is 10 000 operating cycles.
Minimum requirements must be fulfilled in the switchgear for the interlocking to function:• Bowden wires must be installed as far as possible in a straight
line with minimum bending.
• The bending radii of the Bowden wire must be greater than 500 mm.
• The sum of all bending angles along the Bowden wire must not exceed 640°.
• In a vertical arrangement of circuit breakers to be interlocked, the interlocking mechanisms must be in line.
• Circuit breakers to be interlocked must be arranged so that Bowden cables can be optimally installed in compliance with the conditions mentioned in the above points.
• The installed Bowden wire must be fixed (with cable ties or the like) before the interlock is adjusted.
• Select the width of switchgear cubicle to allow enough free-dom of movement for adjusting the interlock!
• Openings and cut-outs in system elements must be designed so that Bowden wires are not changed in direction or ob-structed when they are passed through.
Mutual mechanical interlocking of circuit breakers – examples
Mutual interlocking of two circuit breakers
Interlocking between three circuit breakers
Mutual interlocking of three circuit breakers
Interlocking of three circuit breakers, two of them mutual
�
�����
�� ��
�����
�� ��
��
�����
�� �� ��
�
�����
�� �� ��
�
�� ��
��
����
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
15/20 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
15
Communication-capable circuit breakers
Communication with PROFIBUS DP
Communication with MODBUS
The requirements for power distribution in terms of communica-tion capability, data transparency, flexibility and integration are constantly increasing. An integrated and modular communica-tion architecture was designed for the SENTRON 3WL to ensure that it can satisfy these requirements.
The core component of this architecture is the CubicleBUS, which links together all of the intelligent components within the SENTRON 3WL and enables the easy and safe connection of other additional external components to the circuit breaker. The CubicleBUS is already incorporated and pre-connected in all complete circuit breakers with ETU45B and ETU76B releases.
The high level of modularity of the system allows communication functions to be retrofitted at any time (e. g. the measurement function). Similarly, the upgrade of a non-communication-capa-ble SENTRON 3WL (e .g. changeover from ETU25B to ETU45B with CubicleBUS) can be carried out easily on site in the plant. All modules connected to the CubicleBUS can directly access the existing source data of the circuit breaker, which guarantees the quickest possible access to information and response to events.
Furthermore, additional external modules (including digital in-puts/outputs, analog outputs) can be connected to the CubicleBUS to provide cost-effective solutions for the automa-tion of further devices in the switchgear.
NS
E0_
0182
0a
Ethernet/Intranet/Internet
PLC e.g. SIMATIC S7data acquisition andprocessing
PC with Switch ES PowerSENTRON 3WL/3VL parameterization
and visualization tool throughPROFIBUS DP
Output devicee.g. notebookwith browser
BDABDA Plus
Measurement- function Plus
COM15
BSSETU
Zon
e S
elec
tive
Inte
rlock
ing
mod
ule
Dig
ital o
utpu
t mod
ule
Rel
ay
Dig
ital o
utpu
t mod
ule
Rel
ay, c
onfig
urab
le
Ana
log
outp
ut m
odul
e
Dig
ital i
nput
mod
ule
NS
E0_
0189
4
Ethernet/Intranet/Internet
MODBUS MasterPLC or monitoring software
Configuration anddisplay software
Output devicee.g. notebookwith browser
BDABDAPlus
Measurement function Plus
COM16
BSSETU
MODBUS
Zone
Sel
ectiv
e In
terlo
ckin
g m
odul
e
Dig
ital o
utpu
t mod
ule
Rel
ay
Dig
ital o
utpu
t mod
ule
Rel
ay, c
onfig
urab
le
Ana
log
outp
ut m
odul
e
Dig
ital i
nput
mod
ule
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers
15/21Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
15
SENTRON 3WL communication-capable circuit breakers
Function Solid-state release version
Breaker Status Sensor
PROFI-BUS com-munica-tion port
Mea-sure-ment func-tion Plus
Analog output mod-ules
Digital output mod-ules
Digital input mod-ules
ZSI mod-ules
Breaker Data Adapter
Breaker Data Adapter Plus
ETU45B ETU76B
Functions of the communication-capable SENTRON 3WL circuit breakersIndication of measured values in release (current only) ✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
Indication of measured values in release (U, I, P, S, Q, p.f., etc.) ✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
Indication of measured values (current only), parameter, diagnostic values etc. on display -- ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
Indication of measured values (U, I, P, S, Q, p.f., etc.), parameters, diagnostic values etc. in release -- ✓ ❏ ❏ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
Output of measured values (current only) to rotary coil instruments in control cabinet door ✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
Output of measured values (U, I, P, S, Q, p.f., etc.) to rotary coil instruments in control cabinet door ✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
Output of digital signals (e. g. reason for tripping, alarm signals, status) through contacts
✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
Automatic changeover between parameter sets A and B -- ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏
Read in digital signals and forward to PROFIBUS/MODBUS ✓ ✓ ❏ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏
Transmission of switch information on HTML basis locally to a PC ✓ ✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ✓ ✓
Transmission of switch information on HTML basis through Ethernet ✓ ✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ✓
Short-time grading control for S tripping and G protection ✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ✓ ❏ ❏
Local display of harmonic analysis and waveform memory -- ✓ ❏ ❏ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
Local storage of harmonic analysis and waveform memory and transmission through PROFIBUS ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
Read out protection parameters through PROFIBUS ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
Read out and adjust protection parameters through PROFIBUS -- ✓ ✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏
✓ Required
Function can optionally be taken over by more than one release.
Function can optionally be taken over by one of these modules.
❏ Not necessary for this function, optionally combinable
-- Function not available
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
15/22 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
15
Data that can be transmitted over the PROFIBUS DP/MODBUS or the Breaker Data Adapter
1) Data only available in conjunction with the COM15 module (BUS connec-tion not required).
2) Only possible with ETU76B.
✔ Available
-- Not available
All SENTRON 3WLs with ETU45B, ETU76B (CubicleBUS integrated)
Transmittable circuit breaker dataBSS BDA BSS COM15/COM16
Order code (Order No. of circuit breaker + "–Z")
Order No.
F01+"BDA/BDAPLUS" Order No.
F02/F12
Potential applicationsTransmission of circuit breaker data to PROFIBUS DP or MODBUS and integration into higher-level visualization systems are possible e. g. in PCS7, Power Management Systems, WinCC (incl. add-ons like the text message radio server)
-- ✔
Transmission of circuit breaker data and software (i. e. HTML pages with data) to a local output device, or remotely through Ethernet/Intranet/Internet (without the possibility of integration into higher-level visualization systems) e. g. for monitoring, diagnostics, maintenance and parameterization of individual circuit breakers
✔ --
Utilization of the functionality of all CubicleBUS modules e. g. configuration of the configurable digital output module, status check of the digital input modules, diagnostics
✔ ✔
Transmittable circuit breaker data without integrated measurement functionDevice identification Communication address, Order No., circuit breaker in delivery status, circuit breaker parameters(size, number of poles, rated current module etc.), identification numbers, release type, Free text for plant code and comments
✔
--1)
✔
✔
Operating statuses On/off status message, storage spring, tripped, readinessSwitching position (connected, test and disconnected position, removed) for withdrawable circuit breakers, PROFIBUS/MODBUS write protection on/off, free user input
✔ --1)
--1)
✔✔✔
Control commands Switch circuit breaker on/off, switch free user output on/offReset tripped signalDelete event and history memoryReset the min./max. measured values, reset the maintenance information
--1)
✔ --1)
✔
✔✔✔✔
History Read out the event protocol, read out the release protocol --1) ✔
Maintenance information Number of tripping operations L, S/I and in total, contact wearNumber of operating cycles under load and in total, number of operating hours
✔ --1)
✔✔
Event signals Tripped signal with details of the tripping currentAlarm signals (e. g. overload) with incoming/outgoing informationAll of the named event signals with time stamp
✔--1)
--1)
✔✔✔
Parameterization of the protection functions Reading out of the protection function parametersSettings for the protection function parameters can be changed by means of communicationParameter set switchover possible (set A to set B and back)
✔ ✔2)
✔ 2)
✔ ✔ 2)
✔ 2)
Measured values Phase currents, each with min./max. valueTemperature in the circuit breaker with min./max. valueTemperature in the control cabinet with min./max. valueAll of the named measured values with time stamp
✔--1)
--1)
--1)
✔✔✔✔
Measurement function Plus
Order code F01+ ... or F02+ ... F05Additional transmittable circuit breaker data with integrated measurement functionAdditional event signals Threshold value alarms (e. g. over/underfrequency, over/undervoltage) ✔
Parameterization of the extended protection functions and setpoints (threshold values) Reading out the parameters of the extended protection functionsSettings for the extended protection function parameters can be changedReading out and adjusting threshold values
✔✔✔
Additional measured values Voltages, power, energy, power factor, frequency, each with min./max. valueHarmonic analysisRecording of currents and voltages for configurable events in the curve form memory
✔✔✔
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers
15/23Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
15
CubicleBUS modules
Digital output modules with rotary coding switch
6 items of binary information concerning the state of the circuit breaker (reasons for tripping and warnings) can be output via this module to external signaling devices (e. g. LED, horn) or be used for the selective shut-down of other system components (e. g. frequency converters).
Digital output modules are available in versions with and without a rotary coding switch. On modules with a rotary coding switch it is possible to choose between two signaling blocks each with 6 defined assignments and to set an additional response delay.
All the digital output modules are available as a version with re-lay outputs (CO contacts, up to 12 A). Up to two modules of this type can be connected to one SENTRON 3WL.
Digital output module with rotary coding switch
Digital output modules, configurable
The configurable output module is available for higher-perfor-mance solutions. With this module, random events on the CubicleBUS can be switched directly to one of six available out-puts or three of these outputs can be assigned with up to six events. In other words, up to six events can be placed on one physical output with OR operation. Either BDA/BDA Plus or Switch ES Power is used for configuring.
A relay variant is also available here the same as for the output modules with rotary coding switch. Only one module of this type is possible per SENTRON 3WL.
Digital output module, configurable
Analog output modules
The analog output module can be used to output the following measured values to analog indicators in the control cabinet door:• IL1, IL2, IL3, IN or• UL12, UL23, UL31, UL1N or• PL1, PL2, PL3, Stot or• p.f.1 , p.f.2 , p.f.3, �I % or• favg, ULLavg, Ptot, p.f.avg
Four 4-20-mA/0-10-V interfaces are available for this. The mea-sured values to be output are selected with a rotary coding switch. By using the analog output module it is possible to do without additional converters and their conventional installa-tion/wiring in the main current path. Up to two modules of this type can be connected to one SENTRON 3WL.
Analog output module
Digital input modules
With the digital input module, up to 6 additional binary signals (24 V DC) in the circuit breaker environment can be connected to the system. It is thus possible for example to send messages concerning the state of a switch disconnector or a control cabi-net door to the PROFIBUS DP/MODBUS.
With the digital input module on the CubicleBUS it is also possi-ble for the two different protection parameter sets held in the ETU76B solid-state releases to be switched over automatically in a few milliseconds. It is thus possible, for example, to automati-cally change the parameters of a coupling switch should the transformer infeed fail.
One module each of this type can be used for holding the six items of digital information and for automatically switching over the parameters.
Digital input module
ZSI modules (short-time grading control)
The use of ZSI modules is recommended when Siemens circuit breakers are arranged in several staggered levels but full grad-ing with the smallest possible delay is to be assured nevertheless.
The circuit breakers are interconnected by these modules. In case of a short-circuit, each affected circuit breaker asks the cir-cuit breakers directly downstream whether the short-circuit has also occurred in the next, lower level. The short-circuit is exactly localized as the result, and only the next upstream circuit breaker in the energy flow direction is switched off.
ZSI module (short-time grading control)
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
15/24 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
15
■ Technical specifications
1) Size II with In max � 2500 A.2) Size II with In max = 3200 A and In max = 4000 A.3) At a rated voltage of 690 V the Icw value of the circuit breaker cannot be
greater than the Icu or Ics value at 690 V.4) Rated operational voltage Ue = 1150 V.
Size I II III
Type 3WL11 3WL12 3WL13
Switching capacity class N
S
N
S
H
H
C3-pole
C4-pole
Short-circuit breaking capacityRated operational voltage Ue up to 415 V AC
Icu kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
Ics kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
Icm kA 121 145 145 176 220 220 330 286
Rated operational voltage Ue up to 500 V AC
Icu kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
Ics kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
Icm kA 121 145 145 176 220 220 330 286
Rated operational voltage Ue up to 690 V AC
Icu kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 150 130
Ics kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 150 130
Icm kA 88 105 105 165 187 187 330 286
Rated operational voltage Ue up to 1000 V/1150 V AC
Icu kA -- -- -- -- 45 50 704) 704)
Ics kA -- -- -- -- 45 50 704) 704)
Icm kA -- -- -- -- 95 105 1544) 1544)
Rated short-time withstand current Icw of the circuit breakers3)
0.5 s kA 50 66 66 80 100 100 100 100
1 s kA 42 50 55 66 80 100 100 100
2 s kA 29.5 35 39 46 651)/702) 80 80 80
3 s kA 24 29 32 37 501)/652) 65 65 65Short-circuit breaking capacity Icc of the non-automatic air circuit breakersUp to 500 V AC kA 50 66 66 80 100 100 100 100
Up to 690 V AC kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 100 100
N S N S H H C C
Circuit breakers with ECO switching capacity N (Icu = Ics up to 55 kA size I/up to 66 kA size II at 500 V)
Circuit breakers with standard switching capacity S (Icu = Ics up to 66 kA size I/up to 80 kA size II at 500 V)
Circuit breakers with high switching capacity H (Icu = Ics up to 100 kA at 500 V)
Circuit breakers with very high switching capacity C (Icu = Ics up to 150 kA (3-pole)/130 kA (4-pole) at 500 V)
Circuit breakers with DC switching capacity
These circuit breakers are indicated in the Technical specifications by orange-colored backgrounds.
N
S
H
C
DC
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers
15/25Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
15
1) Opening time on instantaneous short-circuit release with ETU15B = 85 ms.
2) Make-time through closing solenoid for synchronization purposes (short-time excited) 50 ms.
3) Maintenance means: replace main contact elements and arc chutes (see Operating Manual).
4) Use of releases from –20 °C.5) ETU76B with graphics display can be used up to max. 55 °C.
Size I IIType ... 3WL11 10 3WL11 12 3WL11 16 3WL12 08 3WL12 10 3WL12 12 3WL12 16 3WL12 20Rated current In at 40 °C, at 50/60 HzMain conductorN conductor (only on 4-pole versions)
AA
... 1000
... 100012501250
16001600
800800
10001000
12501250
16001600
20002000
Rated operational voltage Ue at 50/60 Hz(for 1000 V version see Catalog LV 1, "Options")
V AC ... 690 ... 690 ... 690 ... 690/1000
... 690/1000
... 690/1000
... 690/1000
... 690/1000
Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp• Main current paths• Auxiliary circuits• Control circuits
kVkVkV
1242.5
1242.5
1242.5
1242.5
1242.5
1242.5
1242.5
1242.5
Isolating function acc. to EN 60947-2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes YesUtilization categories BPermissible ambient temperature• During operation (in operation with LCD max. 55 °C)4)
• During storage (special conditions for LCDs must be observed)
°C°C
–25/+70–40/+70
–25/+70–40/+70
–25/+70–40/+70
–25/+70–40/+70
–25/+70–40/+70
–25/+70–40/+70
–25/+70–40/+70
–25/+70–40/+70
Permissible load At rear horizontal main circuit connections
• Up to 55 °C (Cu bare)• Up to 60 °C (Cu bare)5)
• Up to 70 °C (Cu blackpainted)5)
AAA
100010001000
125012501210
160016001490
800800800
100010001000
125012501250
160016001600
200020002000
Rated rotor operational voltage Uer V 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000Power loss at InWith 3-phase symmetrical load• Fixed-mounted circuit breakers• Withdrawable circuit breakers
WW
100195
105205
150350
4085
4595
80165
85175
180320
Operating times• Make-time• Opening time• Electrical make-time (through closing solenoid)2)
• Electrical opening time (through shunt release)• Electrical opening time (instant. undervoltage release)• Opening time due to ETU, instant. short-circuit release
msmsmsmsmsms
3538807373501)
3538807373501)
3538807373501)
3534
1007373501)
3534
1007373501)
3534
1007373501)
3534
1007373501)
3534
1007373501)
Endurance• Mechanical (without maintenance) Oper. cycles• Mechanical (with maintenance)3) Oper. cycles• Electrical (without maintenance) Oper. cycles• 1000 V version, electrical (without maintenance) Oper. cycles• 1150 V version, electrical (without maintenance) Oper. cycles• Electrical (with maintenance)3) Oper. cycles
10 00020 00010 000----20 000
10 00020 00010 000----20 000
10 00020 00010 000----20 000
10 00015 000
75001000
50015 000
10 00015 000
75001000
50015 000
10 00015 000
75001000
50015 000
10 00015 00075001000
50015 000
10 00015 000
75001000
50015 000
Switching frequency • 690 V version • 1000 V version• 1150 V version
1/h1/h1/h
60----
60----
60----
602020
602020
602020
602020
602020
Minimum interval between tripping operation by solid-state release and next making operation of the circuit breaker (only with autom. mechanical resetting of the lockout device)
ms 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
Mounting position
and/ or
Degree of protection IP20 without cabinet door, IP41 with door sealing frame, IP55 with coverMain conductor minimum cross-sections
• Copper bars, bare
• Copper bars, painted black
Unitsmm2
Unitsmm2
1 × 60 × 101 × 60 × 10
2 × 40 × 102 × 40 × 10
2 × 50 × 102 × 50 × 10
1 × 50 × 101 × 50 × 10
1 × 60 × 101 × 60 × 10
2 × 40 × 102 × 40 × 10
2 × 50 × 102 × 50 × 10
3 × 50 × 103 × 50 × 10
Auxiliary conductors (Cu)Max. number of auxiliary conductors ×cross-section (solid/stranded)
Standard connection = strain-relief clamp• Without end sleeve• With end sleeve acc. to
DIN 46228 Part 2• With twin end sleeve
2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16); 1 × 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)1 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 1 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)Optional connection = tension spring• Without end sleeve• With end sleeve acc. to
DIN 46228 Part 2
2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
Position indicator switches Tension spring terminals 1 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 1 × 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)Weights 3-pole
4-pole
• Fixed-mounted circuit breakers
• Withdrawable circuit breakers
• Guide frames• Fixed-mounted circuit
breakers• Withdrawable circuit
breakers• Guide frames
kg
kg
kgkg
kg
kg
43
45
2550
54
30
43
45
2550
54
30
43
45
2550
54
30
56
60
3167
72
37
56
60
3167
72
37
56
60
3167
72
37
56
60
3167
72
37
56
60
3167
72
37
� � � � � � � � � �
� � � �
� � � � � � � � � �
� � � �
� � � � � � � � �
�
������
���
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
15/26 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
15
1) Opening time on instantaneous short-circuit release with ETU15B = 85 ms.
2) Make-time through closing solenoid for synchronization purposes (short-time excited) 50 ms.
3) Maintenance means: replace main contact elements and arc chutes (see Operating Manual).
4) Use of releases from –20 °C.5) ETU76B with graphics display can be used up to max. 55 °C.6) 4000 A, size II in fixed-mounted version, 3-pole. 7) Size III: data for very high switching capacity.8) Minimum main conductor cross-sections for 4-pole withdrawable circuit
breakers: 4 x 120 x 10 mm.
Size II III
Type 3WL12 25 3WL12 32 3WL12 40 3WL13 40 3WL13 50 3WL13 63
Rated current In at 40 °C, at 50/60 HzMain conductorN conductor (only on 4-pole versions)
AA
25002500
32003200
40004000
40004000
50005000
63006300
Rated operational voltage Ue at 50/60 Hz(for 1000 V version see Catalog LV 1, "Options")
V AC ... 690/1000 ... 690/1000 ... 690 ... 690/1000 ... 690/1000 ... 690/1000
Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp• Main current paths• Auxiliary circuits• Control circuits
kVkVkV
1242.5
1242.5
1242.5
1242.5
1242.5
1242.5
Isolating function acc. to EN 60947-2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Utilization categories B (except switching capacity class DC)
Permissible ambient temperature• During operation (in operation with LCD max. 55 °C)4)
• During storage (special conditions for LCDs must be observed)°C°C
–25/+70–40/+70
–25/+70–40/+70
–25/+70–40/+70
–25/+70–40/+70
–25/+70–40/+70
–25/+70–40/+70
Permissible load6) • Up to 55 °C (Cu bare)• Up to 60 °C (Cu bare)5)
• Up to 70 °C (Cu black painted)5)
AAA
250025002280
320030202870
395038103600
400040004000
500050005000
592058105500
Rated rotor operational voltage Uer V 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
Power loss at InWith 3-phase symmetrical load• Fixed-mounted circuit breakers• Withdrawable circuit breakers
WW
270520
410710
750925
520810
6301050
9001600
Operating times• Make-time• Opening time• Electrical make-time (through closing solenoid)2)
• Electrical opening time (through shunt release)• Electrical opening time (instantaneous undervoltage release)• Opening time due to ETU, instantaneous short-circuit release
msmsmsmsmsms
3534
1007373501)
3534
1007373501)
3534
1007373501)
3534
100737350
3534
100737350
3534
100737350
Endurance• Mechanical (without maintenance) Oper. cycles• Mechanical (with maintenance)3) Oper. cycles• Electrical (without maintenance) Oper. cycles• 1000 V version, electrical (without maintenance) Oper. cycles• 1150 V version, electrical7) (without maintenance) Oper. cycles• Electrical (with maintenance)3) Oper. cycles
1000015000
75001000
50015000
1000015000
40001000
50015000
1000015000
40001000
50015000
500010000
20001000
100010000
500010000
20001000
100010000
500010000
20001000
100010000
Switching frequency• 690 V version• 1000 V version• 1150 V version7)
1/h1/h1/h
602020
602020
602020
602020
602020
602020
Minimum interval between tripping operation by solid-state release and next making operation of the circuit breaker (only with automatical mechanical resetting of the lockout device)
ms 80 80 80 80 80 80
Mounting position
Degree of protection IP20 without cabinet door, IP41 with door sealing frame, IP55 with cover
Main conductor minimum cross-sections
• Copper bars, bare
• Copper bars, painted black
Unitsmm2
Unitsmm2
2 × 100 × 102 × 100 × 10
3 × 100 × 103 × 100 × 10
4 × 120 × 104 × 100 × 108)
4 x 100 x 104 × 100 × 10
6 x 100 x 106 × 100 × 10
6 x 120 x 106 × 120 × 10
Auxiliary conductors (Cu)Max. number of auxiliary conductors × cross-section (solid/stranded)
Standard connection = strain-relief clamp• Without end sleeve• With end sleeve acc. to DIN 46228 Part 2• With twin end sleeve
2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16); 1 × 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)1 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 1 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
Optional connection = tension spring• Without end sleeve• With end sleeve acc. to DIN 46228 Part 2
2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
Position indicator switches
Tension spring terminals 1 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 1 × 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)
Weights 3-pole
4-pole
• Fixed-mounted circuit breakers• Withdrawable circuit breakers• Guide frames• Fixed-mounted circuit breakers• Withdrawable circuit breakers• Guide frames
kgkgkgkgkgkg
596339717647
646845778254
85121 52103146 62
82886099
10684
82886099
10684
909670
108108119
� � � � � � � � � �
� � � �
� � � � � � � � � �
� � � �
and/ or
� � � � � � � � �
�
������
���
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers
15/27Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
15
1) 24 V and 30 V only with undervoltage release UVR (F3).
Size I to III
Type 3WL1
Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing
Closing/Charging stored-energy feature
Max. force required to operate the hand leverRequired number of strokes on the hand lever
N � 2309
Manual operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical closing
Charging stored-energy feature
Closing solenoid (CC)
• Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us
• Extended operating range for battery operation At 24 V DC, 48 V DC60 V DC, 110 V DC220 V DC
0.7 ... 1.26 × Us
• Power consumption AC/DC VA/W 15/15
• Minimum command duration at Us for the closing solenoid ms 60
• Short-circuit protection Smallest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class)/miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic
1 A TDz (slow)/1 A
Manual/motorized operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical closing
Manual operating mechanism
For data see above.
Motor • Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us
• Extended operating range for battery operation At 24 V DC, 48 V DC60 V DC, 110 V DC220 V DC
0.7 ... 1.26 × Us
• Power consumption of motor AC/DC VA/W 135/135
• Time required to charge the stored-energy mechanism at 1 × Us s � 10
Closing solenoid For data see above.
For motor and closing solenoid
• Short-circuit protection Smallest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class)/miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic; Motor and closing solenoid for the same rated control supply voltages
2 A TDz (slow)/1 A
• Smallest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class)/miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic (for different rated control supply voltages)
At Us = 24 ... 30 VAt Us = 48 ... 60 VAt Us = 110 ... 125 V DC/110 ... 127 V ACAt Us = 220 ... 250 V DC/208 ... 240 V AC
2 A2 A1 A
1 A
Solid-state release signalsMeasuring accuracy of the solid-state release Protection functions according to
EN 60947; current indication � 10 %;Measurement functionbase quantities � 1 %;Measurement functionderived quantities � 4 %
Auxiliary releasesUndervoltage releases UVR (F3) and UVR-td (F4)
• Response values Pickup
Dropout
� 0.85 × Us (circuit breaker can be closed)0.35 ... 0.7× Us (circuit breaker is tripped)
• Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1
• Extended operating range for battery operation At 24 V DC, 30 V DC, 48 V DC, 110 V DC, 220 V DC
0.85 ... 1.26
• Rated control supply voltage Us Instantaneous AC 50/60 HzDC
Delayed AC 50/60 HzDC
VV
VV
110 ... 127/208 ... 240/380 ... 41524/30/48/60/110/220 ... 2501)
110 ... 127; 208 ... 240; 380 ... 41548; 110 ... 125; 220 ... 250
• Power consumption (pickup/uninterrupted duty) ACDC
VAW
20/520/5
• Opening time of circuit breaker at Us = 0 ms 200- Version UVR (F3)
InstantaneousWith delay
msms
80 200
- Version UVR-td (F8)With delay, td = 0.2 to 3.2 sReset through additional NC contact – direct switching off
sms
0.2 ... 3.2 � 100
• Short-circuit protectionSmallest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class)/Miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic
1 A TDz (slow) 1 A
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
15/28 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
15
Size I to III
Type 3WL1
Auxiliary releasesShunt release (ST)(F1, F2)
• For continuous command (100 % ON period), locks out on momentary-con-tact commands
- Response value pickup > 0.7 × Us (circuit breaker is tripped)
- Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us
- Extended operating range for battery operation
At 24 V DC, 48 V DC60 V DC, 110 V DC220 V DC
0.7 ... 1.26 × Us
- Rated control supply voltage Us AC 50/60 HzDC
VV
110; 23024; 30; 48; 60; 110; 220
- Power consumption AC/DC VA/W 15/15
- Minimum command duration at Us ms 60
- opening time of circuit breaker at Us = 100 %
AC/DC ms 80
- Short-circuit protection Smallest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operationalclass)/ miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic
1 A TDz (slow)/1 A
5 % ON period - Response value Pickup > 0.7 × Us (circuit breaker is tripped)
- Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us
- Extended operating range for battery operation
At 24 V DC, 48 V DC60 V DC, 110 V DC220 V DC
0.7 ... 1.26 × Us
- Rated control supply voltage Us AC 50/60 HzDC
VV
110 ... 127; 208 ... 24024; 48; 110 ... 125; 220 ... 250
- Power consumption AC/DC VA/W 15/15
- Minimum command duration at Us ms 25
- Opening time of circuit breaker at Us = 100 %
AC/DC ms 50
- Short-circuit protection Smallest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class)/miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic
1 A TDz (slow)/1 A
• With stored energy feature consisting of shunt release and capac-itor storage device
- Rated control supply voltage Us AC 50/60 HzDC
VV
110; 230110; 220
- Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us
- Power consumption AC/DC VA/W 1/1
- Storage time at Us/recharging time at Us
maximum 5 min/minimum 5 s
- Opening time of circuit breaker, short-circuit protection
As with "for continuous command"
Remote reset solenoid for mechanical tripped indicator (F7)Remote reset solenoid for mechanical tripped indica-tor (F7)
- Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us
- Extended operating range for battery operation
At 24 V DC, 48 V DC110 V DC220 V DC
0.7 ... 1.26 × Us
- Power consumption AC/DC VA/W 50/50
- Minimum command duration at Us for the remote reset solenoid
ms 60
- Short-circuit protection Smallest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class)/miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic
2 A TDz (slow)/1 A at 24 V DC and 48 V DC, 1 A TDz (slow)/1 A at 110 V and 208 ... 250 V
Contact position-driven auxiliary switches (S1, S2, S3, S4, S7, S8)Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC/DC 500
Rated operational voltage Ue V AC/DC 500
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 4
Switching capacity • Alternating current 50/60 Hz
- Rated operational voltage Ue- Rated operational current
Ie /AC-12 Ie/AC-15
V
AA
24 ... 230
104
380/400
103
500
102
• Direct current - Rated operational voltage Ue- Rated operational current
Ie/DC-12 Ie/DC-13
V
AA
24
10 8
48
8 4
110
3.5 1.2
220
1 0.4
Short-circuit protection • Largest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class) • Largest permissible miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic
10 A TDz, 10 A Dz10 A
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers
15/29Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
15
Size I to III
Type 3WL1
Ready-to-close signaling switch (S20) (acc. to DIN VDE 0630)Switching capacity • Alternating current - Rated operational voltage Ue
- Rated operational current IeVA
2508
• Direct current - Rated operational voltage Ue- Rated operational current Ie
VA
1250.4
2500.2
Short-circuit protection Largest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class) 2 A Dz (quick)
Tripped signal switch (S24) and signal switch for auxiliary releases (S22, S23) (acc. to DIN VDE 0630)Switching capacity • Alternating current - Rated operational voltage Ue
- Rated operational current Ie/AC-12VA
2508
• Direct current - Rated operational voltage Ue- Rated operational current Ie/DC-12
VA
246
1250.4
2500.2
Short-circuit protection Largest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class) 6 A Dz (quick)
Tripped signal switch Signal duration after tripping Until manual or electrical remote reset (option)
Position indicator switch on guide frameType of contact • Signal: - "Circuit breaker in connected
position"- "Circuit breaker in test position"- "Circuit breaker in disconnected
position"
3 CO2 CO1 CO
or1 CO1 CO1 CO
Rated insulation voltage Ui AC 50/60 HzDC
VV
440250
Rated operational voltage Ue V 250
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 4
Switching capacity • Rated operational current Ie
- Ie/AC-12
- Ie/AC-15
- Ie/DC-12
- Ie/DC-13
- A 300 (AC)
- R 300 (DC)
24 V 10 A, 110/127 V 10 A, 220/240 V 10 A, 320/440 V 10 A220/240 V 4 A, 320/440 V 3 A,24 V 10 A, 48 V 2.5 A,220/240 V 0.2 A,24 V 3.0 A, 220/240 V 0.1 A
120 V 6 A, 240 V 3 A
125 V 0.22 A, 250 V 0.11 A
Short-circuit protection • Largest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class)• Largest permissible miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic
8 A TDz (slow)8 A TDz (slow)
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
15/30 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
15
For the setting range of the operating current Ig see page 15/31.
Protection functions ETU15B ETU25B ETU27BParameterization by D D D & SFunctional overview of the solid-state release system
L
Overload protectionFunction can be switched on/off
✓--
✓--
✓--
Setting range IR = In × ... 0.5-0.55-0.6-0.65-0.7-0.75-0.8-0.85-0.9-1
0.4-0.45-0.5-0.55-0.6-0.65-0.7-0.8-0.9-1
0.4-0.45-0.5-0.55-0.6-0.65-0.7-0.8-0.9-1
Switchable overload protection (I2t- or I4t-dependent function)
-- -- --
Setting range for time-lag class tR at I2t 10 s fixed 10 s fixed 10 s fixedSetting range for time-lag class tR at I4t -- -- --Thermal image can be switched on/off -- -- --Phase failure sensitivity -- at tsd = 20 ms (M) at tsd = 20 ms (M)
NNeutral conductor protection -- -- ✓
Function can be switched on/off -- -- ✓ N conductor setting range IN = In × ... -- -- 1
S
Short-time delayed short-circuit protection -- ✓ ✓
Function can be switched on/off -- -- --Setting range Isd = In × ... -- 1.25-1.5-2-2.5-3-4-6-8-10-12 1.25-1.5-2-2.5-3-4-6-8-10-12Setting range for delay time tsd -- 0-M-100-200-300-400 ms 0-M-100-200-300-400 msSwitchable short-time delayed short-circuit protection (I2t-dependent function)
-- -- --
Setting range for delay time tsd at I2t -- -- --Zone Selective Interlocking function -- -- --
IInstantaneous short-circuit protection ✓ ✓ ✓
Function can be switched on/off -- -- --Setting range Ii = In × ... 2-3-4-5-6-7-8 Fixed for Ii � 20 × In, max. 50 kA Fixed for Ii � 20 × In, max. 50 kA
G
Ground-fault protection -- -- ✓ Fixed mountedTripping and alarm function -- -- --Tripping function can be switched on/off -- -- ✓ Alarm function can be switched on/off -- -- --Detection of the ground-fault current through summation current formation with internal or external neutral con-ductor transformer
-- -- ✓
Detection of ground-fault current through external current transformer
-- -- --
Setting range of the operating current Ig for release -- -- A-B-C-D-ESetting range of the operating current Ig for alarm -- -- --Setting range of the delay time tg -- -- 100-200-300-400-500 msSwitchable ground-fault protection characteristic curve (I2t-dependent function)
-- -- --
Setting range for delay time tg at I2t -- -- --
Zone Selective Interlocking ground-fault protect. func. -- -- --Parameter set switchover
Switchable between parameter set A and B -- -- --LCD
Alphanumeric LCD (4-line) -- -- --Graphical LCD (24 V, ext. power supply required) -- -- --
CommunicationCubicleBUS integrated -- -- --Communication-capable through PROFIBUS DP -- -- --
Measurement functionMeasurement-function capable with measurement function Plus
-- -- --
LED displaySolid-state release active ✓ ✓ ✓
Alarm ✓ ✓ ✓
ETU fault ✓ ✓ ✓
L-release -- ✓ ✓
S-release -- ✓ ✓
I-release -- ✓ ✓
N-release -- -- ✓
G-release -- -- ✓
G-alarm -- -- --Release through extended protection function -- -- --Communication -- -- --
Signals from signal switches with external CubicleBUS modules (relays)Overload warning -- -- --Load shedding, load receiving -- -- --Leading signal overload trip 200 ms -- -- --Temperature alarm -- -- --Phase unbalance -- -- --Instantaneous short-circuit release -- -- --Short-time delayed short-circuit release -- -- --Overload trip -- -- --Neutral conductor release -- -- --Ground-fault protection release -- -- --Ground-fault alarm -- -- --Auxiliary relay -- -- --ETU fault -- -- --
�
� � � � � � � � � � �
�
� �
� �
�
� � � � � � � � �
�
�
��������
��������
Delay time figures given in ms. ✓ AvailableM = Motor protection, corresponds to 20 ms. -- Not availableD = Rotary coding switch ❑ OptionalD & S = Rotary coding and slide switchK = CommunicationM/K = Menu/communication
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers
15/31Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
15
Protection functions ETU45B ETU76BParameterization by D & S M/KFunctional overview of the solid-state release systemOverload protectionFunction can be switched on/off
✓--
✓✓
Setting range IR = In × ... 0.4-0.45-0.5-0.55-0.6- 0.65-0.7-0.8-0.9-1
0.4 ... 1
Switchable overload protection (I2t- or I4t-dependent function)
✓ ✓
Setting range for time-lag class tR at I2t 2-3.5-5.5-8-10-14-17-21-25-30 s 2 ... 30 sSetting range for time-lag class tR at I4t 1-2-3-4-5 s 1 ... 5 sThermal image can be switched on/off ✓ ✓
Phase failure sensitivity At tsd = 20 ms (M) ✓ (on/off)Neutral conductor protection ✓ ✓
Function can be switched on/off ✓ ✓ N conductor setting range IN = In × ... 0.5 ... 1 0.2 ... 2Short-time delayed short-circuit protection ✓ ✓
Function can be switched on/off ✓ ✓ Setting range Isd = In × ... 1.25-1.5-2-2.5-3-4-6-8-10-12 1.25 × In ... 0.8 × IcwSetting range for delay time tsd M-100-200-300-400 ms M-80 ... 4000 msSwitchable short-time delayed short-circuit protection (I2t-dependent function)
✓ ✓
Setting range for delay time tsd at I2t 100-200-300-400 ms 100 ... 400 msZone Selective Interlocking function By CubicleBUS-Modul By CubicleBUS-ModulInstantaneous short-circuit protection ✓ ✓
Function can be switched on/off ✓ ✓ Setting range Ii = In × ... 1.5-2.2-3-4-6-8-10-12-0.8 x Ics 1.5 × In ... 0.8 × IcsGround-fault protection ❑ Module can be retrofitted ❑ Module can be retrofittedTripping and alarm function ✓ ✓
Tripping function can be switched on/off ✓ ✓ Alarm function can be switched on/off -- ✓ Detection of the ground-fault current through summation cur-rent formation with int. or ext. neutral conductor transformer
✓ ✓
Detection of ground-fault current through external current transformer
✓ ✓
Setting range of the operating current Ig for release A-B-C-D-E A ... ESetting range of the operating current Ig for alarm A-B-C-D-E A ... ESetting range of the delay time tg 100-200-300-400-500 ms 100 ... 500 msSwitchable ground-fault protection characteristic curve (I2t-dependent function)
✓ ✓
Setting range for delay time tg at I2t 100-200-300-400-500 ms 100 ... 500 msZone Selective Interlocking ground-fault protect. function By CubicleBUS-Modul By CubicleBUS-ModulParameter set switchoverSwitchable between parameter set A and B -- ✓
LCDAlphanumeric LCD (4-line) ❑ --Graphical LCD (24 V, external power supply required) -- ✓
CommunicationCubicleBUS integrated ✓ ✓
Communication-capable through PROFIBUS DP ✓ ✓
Measurement functionMeasurement-function capable with measurement function Plus
✓ ✓
LED displaySolid-state release active ✓ ✓
Alarm ✓ ✓
ETU fault ✓ ✓
L-release ✓ ✓
S-release ✓ ✓
I-release ✓ ✓
N-release ✓ ✓
G-release ✓ (only with ground-fault prot. module) ✓ (only with ground-fault prot. module)G-alarm ✓ (only with ground-fault prot. module) ✓ (only with ground-fault prot. module)Release through extended protection functions ✓ ✓
Communication ✓ ✓
Signals from signal switches with external CubicleBUS modules (relays)Overload warning ✓ ✓Load shedding, load receiving ✓ ✓Leading signal overload trip 200 ms ✓ ✓Temperature alarm ✓ ✓Phase unbalance ✓ ✓Instantaneous short-circuit release ✓ ✓Short-time delayed short-circuit release ✓ ✓Overload trip ✓ ✓Neutral conductor release ✓ ✓Ground-fault protection release ✓ (only with ground-fault prot. module) ✓ (only with ground-fault prot. module)Ground-fault alarm ✓ (only with ground-fault prot. module) ✓ (only with ground-fault prot. module)Auxiliary relay ✓ ✓ETU fault ✓ ✓
Setting range of the operating current Ig Increment size for adjustment of M For continuation of legend see page 15/30.
Size I and size II Size III From ... to Increment size
From ... to Increment size
A 100 A 400 A 0 ... 1 0.1 1000 ... 1600 50B 300 A 600 A 1 ... 100 1 1600 ... 10000 100C 600 A 800 A 100 ... 500 5 10000 ... max 1000D 900 A 1000 A 500 ... 1000 10E 1200 A 1200 A
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Project planning aids
15/32 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
15
■ Characteristic curves
Every solid-state release type and every setting has its own characteristic curve. Only a selection is shown in the following. The characteristic curves each show the largest and smallest setting range of SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers with 1000 A rated current at 500 V rated voltage with various releases. In or-der to obtain a complete tripping characteristic, the relevant parts of the characteristics have to be combined.The characteristic curves show the behavior of the solid-state re-lease when it is activated by a current that is already flowing be-fore the tripping operation. If the overcurrent tripping occurs im-mediately after switch on and the solid-state release is therefore not yet enabled, the opening time is extended, depending on the level of the overcurrent by up to 15 ms. In order to determine the break-times of the circuit breakers, approximately 15 ms must be added to the opening times shown for the arcing time.2)
Refer to the following legend for tolerances.The characteristic curves shown apply to ambient temperatures at the circuit breaker between –5 and +55 °C. The release can be operated at ambient temperatures of –20 to +70 °C. An ex-tended tolerance band can apply at these temperatures.
SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker with ETU25B solid-state release, LSI characteristic curve
SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker with ETU27B solid-state release, G characteristic curve
Tolerances for the set currents L: tripping operations between 1.05 and 1.2 x IRS: –0 %, +20 %I: –0 %, +20 %G: –0 %, +20 %
Tolerances for the tripping times L: –20 %, +0 % for I2t characteristic curveS: –0 %, +60 ms or -0 %, 10 % for tripping times greater than 600 ms I: < 50 ms G: –0 %, +60 ms or -0 %, 10 % for tripping times greater than 600 ms
SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker with ETU15B solid-state release
SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker with ETU27B solid-state release, LSIN characteristic curve
SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker with ETU45B solid-state release, S characteristic curve1) Sizes I and II: 100 ... 1200 A
Size III: 400 ... 1200 A. 2) With single-pole loading in the lowest rated current range, the response
times of the short-circuit release can be extended by approx. 10 % and the tripping times by approx. 15 % compared to the characteristic curve.
0,01
0,1
1
10
100
1000
10000
0,1 1 10 100
NS
E0_
0152
0
[s]
/ n
R min R max
0,4 ... 1,0 x n
sd min1,25 ... 12 x n
0 ... 0,4 s
sd max
sd max
sd min
i > 20 x nmax. 50 kA
i
Op
enin
g ti
me
0,01
0,1
1
10
100
1000
10000
100 1000 10000 100000
NS
E0_
0152
1
[s]
g min g max
100 ... 1200 A1)
0,1 ... 0,5 s g max
g min
A
Op
enin
g ti
me
0,01
0,1
1
10
100
1000
10000
0,1 1 10 100
NS
E0_
0152
7
[s]
/ n
i min i max
R min R max
0,5 ... 1,0 x n
2 ... 8 x n
Op
enin
g ti
me
0,01
0,1
1
10
100
1000
10000
0,1 1 10 100
NS
E0_
0151
9
[s]
/ n
R min R max
0,4 ... 1,0 x nN
sd min1,25 ... 12 x n
0 ... 0,4 s
sd max
sd max
sd min
i > 20 x nmax. 50 kA
i
Op
enin
g ti
me
0,01
0,1
1
10
100
1000
10000
0,1 1 10 100
NS
E0_
0152
3
[s]
sd
0,1 ... 0,4 s
/ n
2sd = const
1,25 ... 12 x n
2sd = const
sd = const
0,02 ... 0,4 s
Op
enin
g ti
me
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers
15/33Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Project planning aids
15
Every solid-state release type and every setting has its own characteristic curve. Only a selection is shown in the following. The characteristic curves each show the largest and smallest setting range of SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers with 1000 A rated current at 500 V rated voltage with various releases. In or-der to obtain a complete tripping characteristic, the relevant parts of the characteristics have to be combined.The characteristic curves show the behavior of the solid-state re-lease when it is activated by a current that is already flowing be-fore the tripping operation. If the overcurrent tripping occurs im-mediately after switch on and the solid-state release is therefore not yet enabled, the opening ime is extended, depending on the level of the overcurrent by up to 15 ms. In order to determine the break-times of the circuit breakers, approximately 15 ms must be added to the opening times shown for the arcing time.2)
Refer to the following table for tolerances.The characteristic curves shown apply to ambient temperatures at the circuit breaker between -5 and +55 °C. The release can be operated at ambient temperatures of -20 to +70 °C (ETU76B with graphics display up to +55 °C). An extended tolerance band can apply at these temperatures.
SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker with ETU45B and ETU76B solid-state release, L characteristic curve
SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker with ETU45B and ETU76B solid-state release, I characteristic curve
SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker with ETU45B and ETU76B solid-state release, G characteristic curve
SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker with ETU76B solid-state release, S characteristic curve
Further characteristic curves are shown in the manual and the planning and configuring tool SIMARIS deSign, or ask your Siemens contact person.
Tolerances for the set currents L: tripping operations between 1.05 and 1.2 × IRS: –0 %, +20 %I: –0 %, +20 %G: –0 %, +20 %
Tolerances for the tripping times L: –20 %, +0 % for I2t characteristic curveS: –0 %, +60 ms or -0 %, 10 % for tripping times greater than 600 ms I: < 50 ms G: –0 %, +60 ms or -0 %, 10 % for tripping times greater than 600 ms
1) Sizes I and II: 100 ... 1200 A Size III: 400 ... 1200 A.
2) With single-pole loading in the lowest rated current range, the response times of the short-circuit release can be extended by approx. 10 % and the tripping times by approx. 15 % compared to the characteristic curve.
0,01
0,1
1
10
100
1000
10000
0,1 1 10 100
NS
E0_
0152
2a
[s]
R
/ n
0,4 ... 1,0 x n
R24
2 ... 30s for
4 = const
2 = const
1 ... 5s for
Op
enin
g ti
me
0,01
0,1
1
10
100
1000
10000
0,1 1 10 1
NS
E0_
0152
4a
[s]
/ n
i
1,5 x n ... 0,8 x cs
/ cs
Op
enin
g ti
me
0,01
0,1
1
10
100
1000
10000
100 1000 10000 100000
NS
E0_
0152
5a
g 0,1 ... 0,5 s
g
[s]
100 ... 1200 A1)
A
Op
enin
g ti
me
2 = const
0,01
0,1
1
10
100
1000
10000
0,1 1 10 1
NS
E0_
0152
6a
[s]
/ n / cw
sd
0,02 ... 4 s
2sd
0,1 ... 0,4 s
1,25 x n ... 0,8 x cw
sd
Op
enin
g ti
me
= const = const
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Project planning aids
15/34 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
15
■ Dimensional drawings
Voltage transformer for SENTRON 3WL
Current transformers for overload protection in the N conductor
External current transformers for N conductor with copper connection pieces
■ Dimensions for option with door interlocking
1) Mounting surface
2) Center SENTRON 3WL operator panel
3) 8 mounting holes for door sealing frame
4) 3 mounting holes for door interlocking
External current transformers for N conductor without copper connection pieces
Door cut-out for operator panel
Door cut-out for operator panel using the door sealing frame
Size I, 3WL9 111-0AA31-0AA0
Size II, 3WL9 111-0AA32-0AA0
Size III, 3WL9 111-0AA33-0AA0
NSE0_01103a
277
125
99For mounting on35 mm standardmounting rail
� �
� �
��
��
��
���
��������
� �
� �
� �
���
� � � � � �
��
��
� � � �
� �
� � � �
� � � �
� � �
��
��
��
���
��������
� � � �
���
�
� � �
��
��
� �
� � �
� �
� � �
� � � �
���
� � � �
��
��
��
���
��������
� � � � � �
� � �
��
��
Size I, 3WL9 111-0AA21-0AA0
Size II, 3WL9 111-0AA22-0AA0
Size III, 3WL9 111-0AA23-0AA0
Door cut-out with edge protector
Inner dimensions with mounted edge protector
Option with/without door interlocking
��������
� �
��
��
����
�
� � � � � �
� � � �
� �
� �
� �
� �
� �
���
��
� �
����������
� �
���
���
� � � �
� �
� � � �
����
� �
� �
��������
� � �
��
� � �
� � �
� ��
� � � �
���
���
���
���
� � �
� � � � � � � � �
� �� � �
� � �
� � �
� � � � �
� � � �
� �
� �
��
� � � � �
���
���
���
� � � � �
���
���
���
� � � � �
� � � � � � � � �
� � � �
� �
� �
� �
����
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers
15/35Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Project planning aids
15
CubicleBUS module3WL9 111-0AT2.-0AA0
Breaker Data Adapter (BDA)3WL9 111-0AT28-0AA0
3WL9 111-0AT33-0AA0
47,5
70
94
86
6
81,945,5
3819
153
30
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Project planning aids
15/36 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
15
Door cut-out for operator panel using protective cover IP55
Safety clearances from grounded parts
Protective cover, IP55
Safety clearances from live parts
1) Value for plate; 0 mm for struts and grids.2) 40 mm (size II: 70 mm) for plates which cover the lateral openings in the
guide frame.
All safety clearances above the circuit breaker refer to the upper edge of the auxiliary connector - not to the upper edge of the arc chute! See dimensional drawings on pages 15/37 to 15/45, parts 4) and 5).
Rated operational voltage
V/AC
Above auxiliary connector mm
Lateral (each side) mm
Rear
mm
Size I, fixed-mounted version 500 751) 0 0690 751) 0 0
Size I, withdrawable version, without arc chute cover500 501) 0 0690 501) 0 0
Size I, withdrawable version, with arc chute cover500 0 02) 0690 0 02) 0
Size II, fixed-mounted version 500 751) 0 0690 751) 0 01000 180 0 0
Size II, withdrawable version, without arc chute cover500 501) 0 0690 501) 0 01000 100 0 0
Size II, withdrawable version, with arc chute cover 500 0 02) 0690 0 02) 0
Size III, fixed-mounted version 500 751) 0 0690 751) 0 01000 180 0 0
Size III, withdrawable version, without arc chute cover500 501) 0 0690 501) 0 01000 100 0 0
Size III, withdrawable version, with arc chute cover500 0 02) 0690 0 02) 0
DC non-automatic air circuit breakers300 45 0 0600 200 0 01000 150 0 0
��� ���
�����
����
��
��� ���
���
������
��� �����
��
��
����������������� ! �
"��������#�$%&� �%�$�#�������$���' �%$&�
Rated operational voltage
V/AC
Above auxiliary connector mm
Lateral (each side) mm
Rear
mm
Size I, fixed-mounted version 500 150 20 20690 300 50 125
Size I, withdrawable version, without arc chute cover500 150 20 14690 300 50 14
Size I, withdrawable version, with arc chute cover500 14 100 14690 14 100 14
Size II, fixed-mounted version500 250 50 20690 600 100 1401000 430 100 125
Size II, withdrawable version, without arc chute cover 500 250 50 14690 600 100 301000 350 100 14
Size II, withdrawable version, with arc chute cover 500 14 50 14690 14 225 14
Size III, fixed-mounted version500 75 20 20690 500 100 1251000 430 100 125
Size III, withdrawable version, without arc chute cover500 50 20 14690 500 100 141000 350 100 14
Size III, withdrawable version, with arc chute cover500 14 50 14690 14 200 14
�
�����
���
�
�����
��
��
������
�����������������������������
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers
15/37Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Project planning aids
15
Size I, up to 1600 A, fixed-mounted version, 3- and 4-pole
——— 4-pole version
1) Mounting space for removal of the arc chutes.
2) Arc quenching space.
3) Grooves (4 mm wide, 5 mm deep) for supporting phase barriers in the system.
4) Auxiliary connector with SIGUT screw terminals.
5) Auxiliary connector with spring-loaded connection.
6) Dimension to inside surface of the closed cabinet door.
7) Fixing points for mounting the circuit breaker in the system.
8) "Secure OFF" locking device.
9) Key operation.
11) Terminal face.
14) Space for electrical auxiliary circuit connections.
For safety clearances to grounded parts and to live parts see page 15/36.
Standard version Horizontal connection
Optional connection variants Front connection (single)
Front connection (double hole) according to DIN 43673
Vertical connection
15270300 10
390
437,
5
123,
544
0,5275
4) 5)NSE0_00611a
� ��
� �
��
���������
�
�� �� �� ��
���� �� ��
��
��
�
��
�
��
��
����
��
��
�
NSE0_00614e
aa
150
275
516
541,
5
1) 2) 14) 9)
150210 106
230 127
6)45
8)33,5
60,5
327,
546
1,5
76
3)
5,5
� ��
� �
�
�
�� ������
�
�� �� ����
�� �� �� ��
��
�
�
��
���� �
��
��
���
��
��
��
���
����
�����
��
��
�� �� ��
����
��
���� �
��
��
���
��
�����
��
���
� � � � �
� � � � �
�����
�
����
� � � �
�� ����
� �� � �
60 90 90 90
b
3)
NSE00619
��
90 90 9060
NSE00620
Rated circuit breaker current
A
a b c d e f g
Up to 1000 10 10 10 11 451 34 541
1250 ... 1600 15 15 15 6 461 39 551
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Project planning aids
15/38 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
15
Size I, up to 1600 A, 3- and 4-pole, withdrawable version
For safety clearances to grounded parts and to live parts see page 15/36.For flange connections see following page.
Standard version Horizontal connection
Optional connection variants Front connection (single)
Front connection (double hole) according to DIN 43673
Vertical connection
——— 4-pole version
2) For guide frame without arc chute cover, arc quenching space facing grounded or non-conductive surfaces.
3) Grooves (4 mm wide, 5 mm deep) for supporting phase barriers in the system.4) Auxiliary connector with SIGUT screw terminals.5) Auxiliary connector with spring-loaded connection.6) Dimension to inside surface of the closed cabinet door.7) SENTRON 3WL in connected position.8) SENTRON 3WL in test position.9) SENTRON 3WL in disconnected position.
10) Fixing holes 10 mm.11) Terminal face.
55
270
3013210
300
320
5)4)
10)
123,
527
546
8,5
465,
5
NSE0_00621a
������
����
��
�
�
�
��
��
�
� � � � � �
� � � � � � � �
� �
� �
������ ��
�
���
��
��
� � �
� � � �
� �
� � �
��
��
45
88,5121,5140,5
220
3)
7)
2)
8)9)
10)
586)
76
327
9
367,5382,5
150
aa
275
46051
9
327,
5
NSE0_00624c
4031
2742
Ø14
����
������
�
��
�
���
��
�
� � � � � �
� � � � � � � �
� �
��
��
��
���
����� � �
��
��
� � �
�
���
� �
� � �
� � � �
�� �� �� ��
��������
����
� ����
��
�
��
�
��
���
�����
��
����
�
��
��
�
�������
� ����
���
� � � � � � � �
�
� �
����� ���
� �
� � �
���
�
260350
287
69
551590
3)
10) 10)90 90
NS
E0_
0063
0a
Rated circuit breaker current A
a b c
Up to 1000 10 10 101250 ... 1600 15 15 15
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers
15/39Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Project planning aids
15
Size I, up to 1600 A, withdrawable version, 3- and 4-pole
3) Grooves (4 mm wide, 5 mm deep) for supporting phase barriers in the system.
For safety clearances to grounded parts and to live parts see page 15/36.
For more connection options see previous page.
Flange connection
121
��
NS
E00
631
� � � �� � � �
� � � � � � � �
� �
���
��
��
�
��
� ��������
��
� �
� � �
� � �
��
��
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Project planning aids
15/40 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
15
Size II, up to 4000 A, fixed-mounted version, 3- and 4-pole
For safety clearances to grounded parts and to live parts see page 15/36. For flange connections see following page.
Standard version Horizontal connection
Optional connection variants Front connection (single)
Front connection (double hole) according to DIN 43673
Vertical connection, up to 3200 A
——— 4-pole version
1) Mounting space for removal of the arc chutes.2) Arc quenching space, "� 690 V" circuit breaker facing grounded or non-conductive
surfaces.3) Grooves (4 mm wide, 5 mm deep) for supporting phase barriers in the system.4) Auxiliary connector with SIGUT screw terminals.5) Auxiliary connector with spring-loaded connection.6) Dimension to inside surface of the closed cabinet door.7) Fixing points for mounting the circuit breaker in the system.
11) Terminal face.12) Circuit breaker upper edge, only 1000 V circuit breaker. 13) Arc quenching space, 1000 V circuit breaker facing grounded or non-conductive
surfaces.14) Space for electrical auxiliary circuit connections.
10270 85
440570
5)4)
123,
527
544
0,5
437,
5
NSE0_00633a
� �
� �
��
� ���������
�
�� ��� ��� ���
��
�� �� �� ��
��
��
�
��
�
�
��
��
�
�
�
���
����
NSE0_00636e150
210230
45
5,5
127
15027
5
327,
546
1,5
76
541,
5
aa
1)
6)
3)
106
451,
551
6621
13)
14)
2)
12)
� ��
� �
�
�
�� ������
�
�� ��� ��� ���
���� �� �� ��
��
����
��
��
��
�
��
���
�
���
�
�
����
130 90
3030
130 13090 35
11)
7)
Ø9
7)
460128139
590
3)Ø13,5
NS
E0_
0063
9f
�����
�����
��
���
��
� �
�� ���
���
���
��
���90 130 130 130
b
3)
NSE00641
3)
13013090 130
NSE00642
Rated circuit breaker current
A
a b c d e f g
Up to 2000 10 10 10 11 451 34 541
2500 15 15 20 6 461 39 551
3200/4000 30 30 20 6 461 39 551
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers
15/41Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Project planning aids
15
Size II, up to 4000 A, fixed-mounted version, 3- and 4-pole
1) Mounting space for removal of the arc chutes.2) Arc quenching space, "� 690 V" circuit breaker facing grounded or non-
conductive surfaces.11) Terminal face.
For safety clearances to grounded parts and to live parts see page 15/36.
For more connection options see previous page.
Vertical connection 4000 A
200 130 200
1020
NS
E0_
0186
8
142162
3030
85 Nm
11)40
100
1)
2)
345,
579
,5 Ø13,5461,
554
1,5
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Project planning aids
15/42 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
15
Size II, up to 3200 A, withdrawable version, 3- and 4-pole
For safety clearances to grounded parts and to live parts see page 15/36.
For vertical connection and flange connection see following page.
Standard version Horizontal connection
Optional connection variants Front connection (single)
Front connection (double hole) according to DIN 43673
——— 4-pole version2) For guide frame � 690 V, without arc chute cover, arc quenching space facing
grounded or non-conductive surfaces.
3) Grooves (4 mm wide, 5 mm deep) for supporting phase barriers in the system.4) Auxiliary connector with SIGUT screw terminals.5) Auxiliary connector with spring-loaded connection.
6) Dimension to inside surface of the closed cabinet door.7) SENTRON 3WL in connected position.8) SENTRON 3WL in test position.9) SENTRON 3WL in disconnected position.
10) Fixing holes, diameter 10 mm.11) Terminal face.12) Guide frame upper edge – only 1000 V AC version.13) Arc quenching space, 1000 V circuit breaker facing grounded or non-conductive
surfaces.
55350270
40
480
10)10)
465,
5
123,
527
546
8,5
NSE0_00643b
4) 5)
�
����
�������
�
�
�
�
�
�
� � � � � � � � � � �
� �
� � � � � � � �
� �
� � �
�
���
� �
����������
��
��
� � �
� � �
� � �
� � �
��
��
2202742
40 31 45 6)
88,5121,5140,5
58
8)9)
7632
7,5
518,
5
150
aa27
546
052062
0
327367,5382,5
13)
12)2)
7)
10)Ø14
9
3)
NSE0_00646f
�
����
�����
�
�� �����
�
� � � � �� � � � � �� �
� �
� � � � � � � �
� �
��
��
��
��
� �
��� ������
��
� � �
��
�����
� � �
� � �
��
��
��
����������
�����
��
�
��
��
��
������
��
���
90400
530
90 90 90
55 45 130 130 13010) 10)
6928
7
NS
E0_
0065
2b
3)
Rated circuit breaker current
A
a b c
Up to 2000 10 10 10
2500 15 15 20
3200/4000 30 30 20
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers
15/43Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Project planning aids
15
Size II, up to 4000 A, withdrawable version, 3- and 4-pole
——— 4-pole version
3) Grooves (4 mm wide, 5 mm deep) for supporting phase barriers in the system.
11) Terminal face.
For safety clearances to grounded parts and to live parts see page 15/36.
For more connection options see previous page.
Vertical connection, up to 3200 A
Vertical connection 4000 A
Flange connection
����
���
���
���
��
�� �
�
���
��
�
��
���
� � � � � � � � � � � � �
�
� �
� � � � � � � �
� � �
� � �
���
�
11)
200
100
NS
E0_
0186
9
40
3030
177197
13055
200
1020
45
315,
5
109,
5
4,6
121
NS
E00
653
� � � � � � � � � � �
� � � �
� �
��
��
�
��
�����
�����
����� ���
� � � �
� � �
� � �
���
�
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Project planning aids
15/44 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
15
Size III, up to 6300 A, fixed-mounted version, 3- and 4-pole
——— 4-pole version
1) Mounting space for removal of the arc chutes.2) Arc quenching space, "� 690 V" circuit breaker facing grounded or
non-conductive surfaces.3) Grooves (4 mm wide, 5 mm deep) for supporting phase barriers in the
system.4) Auxiliary connector with SIGUT screw terminals.5) Auxiliary connector with spring-loaded connection.6) Dimension to inside surface of the closed cabinet door.7) Fixing points for mounting the circuit breaker in the system.
11) Terminal face.12) Circuit breaker upper edge, only 1000 V circuit breaker.
13) Arc quenching space, 1000 V circuit breaker facing grounded or non-conductive surfaces.
14) Space for electrical auxiliary circuit connections.
For safety clearances to grounded parts and to live parts see page 15/36.
Standard version Horizontal connection
Optional connection variants Front connection (single)
Front connection (double hole) according to DIN 43673
Vertical connection
12205270680
890
4) 5)
437,
5
123,
527
544
0,5
NSE0_00655a
��
��
���
��
�
����
�
�� �� �� ��
��
�� �� ��
��
��
�
��
��
��
���
�
��
��
�
�����
NSE0_00658e150
210230
4535
5,5
127
15027
5
327,
546
1,5
76
541,
5
3030
6)
3)
106
451,
551
6621
13) 1)
14)
2)12)
� �
� �
� �
��
��
��� ������
�
� � � � � � � �
� �
� � � � � � � �
� �
��
��
��
�
��� ������
��
�
��
� � � �
� �� � � �
160210
704914
130210
15210
248139
7) 7)
30
NS
E0_
0066
1e
Ø13,5
35
11)
M10
3)
������
��
���
�
�
���
��
��
� ��
�
��
� �
��
��
���� �
�����
85 210 210 210
10
3)
20NSE00663
��
��� ��� ��� ��� ���
�������
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers
15/45Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Project planning aids
15
Size III, up to 6300 A, withdrawable version, 3- and 4-pole
For safety clearances to grounded parts and to live parts see page 15/36.
For flange connections see following page.
Standard version Horizontal connection up to 5000 A
Optional connection variants Front connection (single hole), up to 4000 A
Front connection (double hole) according to DIN 43673 up to 4000 A
Vertical connection, up to 6300 A
——— 4-pole version2) For guide frame � 690 V, without arc chute cover, arc quenching space facing grounded
or non-conductive surfaces. 3) Grooves (4 mm wide, 5 mm deep) for
supporting phase barriers in the system.4) Auxiliary connector with SIGUT screw terminals.5) Auxiliary connector with spring-loaded connection.6) Dimension to inside surface of the closed cabinet door.7) SENTRON 3WL in connected position.8) SENTRON 3WL in test position.9) SENTRON 3WL in disconnected position.
10) Fixing holes, diameter 10 mm.11) Terminal face.12) Guide frame upper edge – only 1000 V guide frame.13) Arc quenching space, 1000 V circuit breaker facing grounded or non-conductive
surfaces.
5)4)
57590
800
16027010) 10) 10)
123,
527
546
8,5
465,
5
NSE0_00665b
��
����
�������
�
��
�
���
��
�
� �
� � � � � � � �
� �
� � � � � � � � � � � �
� �
� � �
� � �
��
�
�� ��������
�
�
� � �
� ����
� �
� � �
���
�
2202742
40 31 45 6)
88,5121,5140,5
58
8)9)
7632
7,5
518,
5
150
3030
275
46052
0620
327367,5382,5
13)
7)12)2)
10)Ø14
3)
9
NSE0_00668d
��
����
�����
�
��
�
���
��
�
� �
� � � � � � � � � � � �
� � � � � � � � � � �
� � �
� �
� �
�
�
���
�
� ���������
��
��
� � �
� �
���� � � �
� �
���
�
���
����
���
�����������
�� ����
��
��
��
��
��
���
������
��
��
� ��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
����
��
���
� �
�
� � �
� � �
� �
� � �
� �
� �
� � �
� � � � � � � � �
� � �
� �
��
��
160
2108557 210 210
630840
160 160 160
6928
7
NS
E0_
0067
4a
Rated circuit breaker current
A
a b
4000 40 2105000 40 2106300 5 245
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Project planning aids
15/46 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
15
Size III, up to 6300 A, withdrawable version, 3- and 4-pole
For safety clearances to grounded parts and to live parts see page 15/36.
For more connection options see previous page.
Flange connection, up to 4000 A
121
NS
E00
675
� � � � � � � � � �
� �
� �
� � �
� �
� � �
� � � � � � � � � � � �
� � �
������
����
��
��
��
��
� ���������
� � �
� �
����
��
��
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers
15/47Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Project planning aids
15
■ Schematics
Terminal assignment diagram
Internal wiring
1413121110
987654321
1413121110
987654321
1413121110
987654321
L1L2L3
24 V DC input
Remote reset bell alarm & tripped indicator F7
G transformer S2
N sensor S2N sensor S1
ext. voltage transformer Comext. voltage transformer L3ext. voltage transformer L2ext. voltage transformer L1
0 V DC24 V DC
G transformer S1
"Spring charged" signal S21
1st auxiliary release F1 "ST"
S1 "NO"
S1 "NC"
Closing solenoid
"Ready to close" signal S20
S2 "NO"
S2 "NC"
F4 only "quick OFF"F4 only "quick OFF"
2nd auxiliary release: F2 "ST", F3 "UVR", F4 "UVR td"
S3 "NO" or S7 "NO"
S3 "NC" or S7 "NO"
S4 "NO" or S8 "NO"
S4 "NC" or S8 "NO"
EMERGENCY STOPor short terminals
Terminals External wiring
L–L+
1413121110
987654321
NS
E0_
0060
5 o
+BUSBUS
Short terminals if no N-sensor
M
Local electric close S10
opt. motor main switch S12Charging motor
(Option F02/F12)/COM16
12
34
56
78
9
DP
Writ
eE
nabl
eFree
Free
Clo
seO
pen
+–
+–
+–
INO
UT
Ext
erna
lIn
tern
al
Y1
F1, 2
N
e.g. current transformer in thestar point of power transformeror a summation currenttransformer 1200 A /1A
Trip signalling switch S24(position after tripping)
Signaling contact at the 1 st auxiliary release
S23Signaling contact at the 2nd auxiliary release
Termination resistor,if not external CB-module!
Not
ava
ilabl
e w
ith c
omm
unic
atio
n co
nnec
tion
"F02
" or “
F12”
.C
OM
15/C
OM
16 m
odul
e is
at p
ositi
on "-
X7"
.
optionalAccessories
(Auxiliary switch S1, S2 = Standard)
(sw) (br)
L1L2L3N
L+L– c
L+ c
L+L– c
c
L+L– c
L+L– c
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Project planning aids
15/48 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
15
Example of an overall circuit diagram for SENTRON 3WL
(3WL1. ..–.....–4GN4–Z C11+ C22 + K07)
Manual/motorized operating mechanism with stored-energy fea-ture with electrical ON button (option C11), with ready-to-close signaling switch (optionl C22), with LSING solid-state release,
with "UVR" undervoltage release (F3), with "ST" shunt release (F1), with tripped signal switch (option K07), with auxiliary switch 4 NO + 4 NC.
Function diagram of SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker
-A1 Solid-state release ETU-S1/-S2 1st auxiliary switch block (2 NO + 2 NC)-S3/-S4 2nd auxiliary switch block (2 NO + 2 NC)-S7 (optional) 2nd auxiliary switch block, S7 (2 NO) can be used
if there is no S3 - S3 and S7 have the same terminal assignment/mounting space
-S8 (optional) 2nd auxiliary switch block, S8 (2 NO) can be used if there is no S4 - S4 and S8 have the same terminal assignment/mounting space
3WL1. ..-.....-...2 (2 NO + 2 NC) S1+S23WL1. ..-.....-...4 (4 NO + 4 NC) S1+S2+S3+S43WL1. ..-.....-...7 (6 NO+ 2 NC) S1+S2+S7+S83WL1. ..-.....-...8 (5 NO + 3 NC) S1+S2+S3+S8
-S10 Electrical ON button-S11 Internal motor shutdown switch (if spring is tensioned) -S12 Motor shutdown switch
(no automatic tensioning of spring)-S20 Ready-to-close signaling switch-S24 Tripped signal switch
-F1 1st auxiliary release, shunt release-F3 2nd auxiliary release, undervoltage release-F5 Tripping solenoid
-M Motor for "charging energy store"-P Stored-energy mechanism-QS Actuator lever for "stored-energy mechanism"-Q1 Main contacts-T1/-T2/-T3 Current transformers-X5/-X6/-X7/-X8 Terminals-Y1 Closing solenoid-R Indicator and reset button for solid-state release
-X8.9/-X8.10 Connection option: external neutral conductor transformer
M
R
-S4-S3-S2-S1-Q1
L1(L+)
-X7.
9 -X
6.7
-X6.
14
-X5.
12
-X5.
2
-X6.
6
-X7.
12-X
7.14
QS P
N(L-)
-S11
-Y1
-F1
-F3
-T3
-T1
-T21 3 5 -X
6.12
-X6.
10
-X6.
4-X
6.2
-X5.
10-X
5.8
-X5.
6-X
5.4
2 4 6
-X6.
11-X
6.9
-X6.
3-X
6.1
-X5.
9-X
5.7
-X5.
5-X
5.3
-X8.
9-X
8.10
*
N(L-)
ETUL
S
I
G
NN
-A1
-F5
-S24
-S20
-X6.
5
-X7.
13
-X5.
11
-X6.
13
-X6.
8
-X5.
1
NS
E0_
0155
8b
L1(L+)
mech.
mech.
-S10
U<
-S12
version
OFF
ON
ON
* Short terminals, if no N sensor
ON
OFF
electr.
releasecontact
NSE0_01559c
M1
P
1
S20
F1
F2
F3
F4
Y1
Q1 S1 & S2S3 & S4
F5
T1
T2
T3
T4
2
3
S24
A1
LSI
GNN
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers
15/49Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
Project planning aids
15
Example of the mode of operation of Zone Selective Interlocking functionality in power distribution
SENTRON 3VL and SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers used in various staggered levels
Connection diagram for a Zone Selective Interlocking functionality with multiple infeed and several outgoing units with SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers
Zone Selective Interlocking functionality: Connection using a coupling switch, use of SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers
■ More information
Up-to-date information on the Internet at: http://www.siemens.com/sentron
SENTRON 3WL
SENTRON 3WL SENTRON 3WL SENTRON 3WL
SENTRON 3WL
SENTRON 3WLSENTRON 3VLN
SE
0_01
897
3456
345
3456
6
3456
3456
3456
ZSI
mod
ule
ZSI
mod
ule
ZSI
mod
ule
ZSI
mod
ule
ZSI
mod
ule
ZSI
mod
ule
SENTRON 3WL SENTRON 3WL
SENTRON 3WL
NSE0_01898
3456
65 1 2 3 4 3456
ZSI
mod
ule
ZSI module ZSI
mod
ule
SENTRON 3WL SENTRON 3WL
SENTRON 3WL
NSE0_01899
3456
65 1 2 3 4 3456
SENTRON 3WL SENTRON 3WL3456
3456
ZSI
mod
ule
ZSI module ZSI
mod
ule
ZSI
mod
ule
ZSI
mod
ule
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)
General data
15/50 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
15
■ Technical specifications
1) Make-time through activation solenoid for synchronization purposes (short-time excited) 50 ms.
2) Maintenance means: replace main contact elements and arc chutes (see Operating Manual).
3) Further technical specifications on request.
1) At Ue = 220 V DC.2) At Ue = 300 V DC.
3) At Ue = 600 V DC.4) At Ue = 1000 V DC.
Size II
Type 3WL12 10 3WL12 20 3WL12 40
Rated current In at 40 °CMain conductor A ... 1000 2000 4000
Rated operational voltage Ue(1000 V version, see Catalog LV 1, order code "A05")
V DC ... 600/1000 ... 600/1000 ... 600/1000
Rated insulation voltage Ui V DC 1000 1000 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp• Main current paths• Auxiliary circuits• Control circuits
kVkVkV
1242.5
1242.5
1242.5
Isolating function acc. to EN 60947-2 Yes Yes Yes
Permissible ambient temperature• Operation• Storage
°C°C
–25/+75–40/+70
–25/+75–40/+70
–25/+75–40/+70
Permissible load At rear horizontal main circuit connections(Cu painted black)
Up to 40 °CUp to 55 °CUp to 60 °CUp to 70 °C
AAAA
1000100010001000
2000200020001950
4000364035003250
Power loss at In for symmetrical loadsWithdrawable circuit breakers W 280 770 1640
Operating times• Make-time• Opening time
• Electrical make-time (through activation solenoid)1)
• Electrical opening time (through shunt release)
• Electrical opening time (instantaneous undervoltage release)
msms
msms
ms
3534
10073
73
3534
10073
73
3534
10073
73
Endurance3)
• Mechanical (without maintenance) Oper. cycles• Mechanical (with maintenance)2) Oper. cycles• Electrical (without maintenance) Oper. cycles• 1000 V version Oper. cycles• Electrical (with maintenance)2) Oper. cycles
10 00015 000
60001000
15 000
10 00015 000
60001000
15 000
10 00015 000
40001000
15 000
Switching frequency • 600 V version • 1000 V version
1/h1/h
6020
6020
6020
Mounting position
Degree of protection IP20 without cabinet door, IP41 with door sealing frame, IP55 with cover
Auxiliary conductors (Cu)Max. number of auxiliary conductors × cross-section(solid/stranded)
Standard connection = strain-relief clamp• Without end sleeve• With end sleeve acc. to DIN 46228 Part 2• With twin end sleeve
2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16); 1 × 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)1 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 1 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
Optional connection = tension spring• Without end sleeve• With end sleeve acc. to DIN 46228 Part 2
2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
Weights 3-pole
4-pole
• Fixed-mounted circuit breakers• Withdrawable circuit breakers• Guide frames
• Fixed-mounted circuit breakers• Withdrawable circuit breakers• Guide frames
kgkgkg
kgkgkg
566031
677237
566031
677237
646845
778254
� � � � � � � � � �
� � � � � �
� � � � � � � � � �
� � � � � �
� � � � � � � � � �
�
������
����
and/ or
Size II
Type 3WL12
Switching capacity class DCShort-circuit breaking capacityUp to 220 V DCUp to 300 V DCUp to 600 V DCUp to 1000 V DC
Icc Icc Icc Icc
kAkAkAkA
35302520
Rated short-time withstand current Icw0.5 s1 s2 s3 s
kAkAkAkA
--351)/302)/253)/204)
----
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers
15/51Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)
Project planning aids
15
■ Characteristic curves
DIGmat S100 characteristic curve
■ Dimensional drawings
DIGmat S100
DIGmat S100 DIGmat S100 drilling pattern
���
��
�
��
���
����
�� �
�����
� �
�
!"#
$%���"�!&#�"�!'#
&
'
&
'
$ %��() � $ %�(� �
����*+���%�( $+
��%�( $+�*',��%�)+ �
��- �
%��()�(((�(�%��(((���"����.%��( ������(((�)
$
$
+
�
$$
��
�������
�
�/01
1�
�
�
�/01��� 2��3 4��5 ����
���/�
��
���
4�5�������
� 6
�������
��
���
��
���
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)
Project planning aids
15/52 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
15
Size II, up to 4000 A, fixed-mounted version, 3- and 4-pole
For safety clearances to grounded parts and to live parts see page 15/36.
Standard version Horizontal connection
Optional connection variants Front connection (single)
Front connection (double hole) according to DIN 43673
Vertical connection
——— 4-pole version
1) Mounting space for removal of the arc chutes.2) Arc quenching space, "� 690 V" circuit breaker facing grounded or non-conductive
surfaces.3) Grooves (4 mm wide, 5 mm deep) for supporting phase barriers in the system.4) Auxiliary connector with SIGUT screw terminals.5) Auxiliary connector with spring-loaded connection.6) Dimension to inside surface of the closed cabinet door.7) Fixing points for mounting the circuit breaker in the system.
11) Terminal face.12) Circuit breaker upper edge, only 1000 V circuit breaker. 14) Space for electrical auxiliary circuit connections. 15) Arc quenching space, 300 V circuit breaker facing grounded or non-conductive
surfaces. 16) Arc quenching space, 600 V circuit breaker facing grounded or non-conductive
surfaces.17) Arc quenching space, 1000 V circuit breaker (with high arc chute) facing grounded or
non-conductive surfaces.
10270 85
440570
5)4)
123,
527
544
0,5
437,
5
NSE0_00633a
��
� �
��
� ���������
�
�� ��� ��� ���
��
�� �� �� ��
��
��
�
��
�
�
��
��
�
�
�
���
����
NSE0_02003150
210230
45
5,5
127
15027
5
327,
546
1,5
76
541,
5
aa
1)
6)
3)
106
451,
551
6602
2)16) 17)
14)
12)15)
447
� ��
� �
�
�
�� ������
�
�� ��� ��� ���
���� �� �� ��
��
����
��
��
��
�
��
���
�
���
�
�
����
130 90
3030
130 13090 35
11)
7)
Ø9
7)
460128139
590
3)Ø13,5
NS
E0_
0063
9f
�����
�����
��
���
��
� �
�� ���
���
���
��
���90 130 130 130
b
3)
NSE00641
3)
13013090 130
NSE00642
Rated circuit breaker current
A
a b c d e f g
Up to 2000 10 10 10 11 451 34 541
4000 30 30 20 6 461 39 551
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers
15/53Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)
Project planning aids
15
Size II, up to 4000 A, withdrawable version, 3- and 4-pole
For safety clearances to grounded parts and to live parts see page 15/36.
For vertical connection and flange connection see following page.
Standard version Horizontal connection
Optional connection variants Front connection (single)
Front connection (double hole) according to DIN 43673
——— 4-pole version2) For guide frame � 690 V, without arc chute cover, arc quenching space facing
grounded or non-conductive surfaces.
3) Grooves (4 mm wide, 5 mm deep) for supporting phase barriers in the system.4) Auxiliary connector with SIGUT screw terminals.5) Auxiliary connector with spring-loaded connection.
6) Dimension to inside surface of the closed cabinet door.
7) SENTRON 3WL in connected position.
8) SENTRON 3WL in test position
9) SENTRON 3WL in disconnected position.
10) Fixing holes, diameter 10 mm.
11) Terminal face.
12) Guide frame upper edge – only 1000 V AC version.
15) Arc quenching space, 300 V circuit breaker facing grounded or non-conductive surfaces.
16) Arc quenching space, 600 V circuit breaker facing grounded or non-conductive surfaces.
17) Arc quenching space, 1000 V circuit breaker (with high arc chute) facing grounded or non-conductive surfaces.
55350270
40
480
10)10)
465,
5
123,
527
546
8,5
NSE0_00643b
4) 5)
�
����
�������
�
�
�
�
�
�
� � � � � � � � � � �
� �
� � � � � � � �
� �
� � �
�
���
� �
����������
��
��
� � �
� � �
� � �
� � �
��
��
2202742
40 31 45 6)
88,5121,5140,5
58
8)9)
7632
7,5
518,
5
150
aa27
546
052065
1
496
327367,5382,5
16) 17)2)
12)15)
7)
10)Ø14
9
3)
NSE0_02084
�
����
�����
�
�� �����
�
� � � � �� � � � � �� �
� �
� � � � � � � �
� �
��
��
��
��
� �
��� ������
��
� � �
��
�����
� � �
� � �
��
��
��
����������
�����
��
�
��
��
��
������
��
���
90400
530
90 90 90
55 45 130 130 13010) 10)
6928
7
NS
E0_
0065
2b
3)
Rated circuit breaker current
A
a b c
Up to 2000 10 10 10
4000 30 30 20
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)
Project planning aids
15/54 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
15
Size II, up to 4000 A, withdrawable version, 3- and 4-pole
——— 4-pole version
3) Grooves (4 mm wide, 5 mm deep) for supporting phase barriers in the system.
11) Terminal face.
For safety clearances to grounded parts and to live parts see page 15/36.
For more connection options see previous page.
Vertical connection
Flange connection
����
���
���
���
��
�� �
�
���
��
�
��
���
� � � � � � � � � � � � �
�
� �
� � � � � � � �
� � �
� � �
���
�
121
NS
E00
653
� � � � � � � � � � �
� � � �
� �
��
��
�
��
�����
�����
����� ���
� � � �
� � �
� � �
���
�
© Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers
15/55Siemens LV 1 T · 2009
3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)
Project planning aids
15
■ Schematics
Schematics of the DIGmat S100 and the SENTRON 3WL non-automatic air circuit breaker
Application examples
The connection to the circuit breakers is not dependent on direc-tion and polarity; the circuit diagrams can be adapted accordingly.If the parallel or series connections are made directly to theconnecting bars, for thermal reasons the continuous load on the circuit breakers must only be 80 % of the permissible operational
current. If the parallel or series connection is made at a distance of 1 m from the connecting bars, the circuit breaker can be used at full operational current load.
] Grounded-neutral system
@ Load
7
�
��
'� �
��)
�
�
,( ,( , ( , (
�
���)
'� �
,)(��
,)(��
,)(��
,)(��
�+��������
�
�
,(
,(
�
�
�8�
97
,)(�
�
,)(�
�
,)(�
�
,)(�
�
,)(�
�
,)(�)
�
,)(�)
�
,)(�
�
��
��
)
)
�,.() �, (����$��
�: �:
�,.( �, (
�8� ) .
�����
� �
��
;��������<�����='�>�����<�?�@��
;'���������$����=
�A���B.��CD
�>���������-�'
����
'����
�����-�$�"��
�����������?��
����������?��
Rated operational voltage
Required series breaks at rated voltage
For 3-pole non-automatic air circuit breakers (operational currents up to 4000 A/conducting path)
For 4-pole non-automatic air circuit breakers(operational currents up to 4000 A/conducting path)
Up to 300 V + 10 %
1-pole, 2 parallel conducting paths, only with grounded-neutral system
2-pole 1-pole, 3 parallel conducting paths, only with grounded-neutral system
2-pole 2 parallel conducting paths
Over 300 V + 10 % Up to 600 V + 10 %
2-pole, only with grounded-neutral system
1-pole, 2 parallel conducting paths, only with grounded-neutral system
2-pole
Over 600 V + 10 % Up to 1000 V + 10 % (version for 1000 V required, order with "-Z" and order code A05)
1-pole, only with grounded-neutral system
2-pole, only with grounded-neutral system
1-pole, only with grounded-neutral system
© Siemens AG 2009